Pioneer GPS Receiver AVIC Z110BT User Manual

Operation Manual  
FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION  
RECEIVER  
AVIC-Z110BT  
Notice to all users:  
This software requires that the navigation system is  
properly connected to your vehicles parking brake and  
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may  
be required. For more information, please contact your  
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
Information to User  
This equipment complies with FCC radiation  
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled  
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency  
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to  
OET65. This equipment has very low levels of  
RF energy that it deemed to comply without  
maximum permissive exposure evaluation  
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-  
stalled and operated with at least 20cm and  
more between the radiator and persons body  
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and  
ankles).  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-  
ference received, including interference that  
may cause undesired operation.  
Alteration or modifications carried out without  
appropriate authorization may invalidate the  
users right to operate the equipment.  
CAUTION:  
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-  
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
CAUTION:  
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH  
THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-  
ZARD.  
FCC ID : AJDK026  
IC : 775E-K026  
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules  
and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference, including inter-  
ference that may cause undesired operation of  
this device.  
WARNING  
MADE IN THAILAND  
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-  
ciated with accessories sold with the product will  
expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65  
known to the State of California and other govern-  
mental entities to cause cancer and birth defect  
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after  
handling.  
For Canadian model  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or op-  
erated in conjunction with any other antenna  
or transmitter.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
other means. You shall not use the Software to  
operate a service bureau or for any other use  
involving the processing of data for other per-  
sons or entities.  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-  
tary ownership rights in the Software. The  
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-  
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-  
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any  
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-  
tained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in  
the Software, the related documentation and a  
copy of this License Agreement to another  
party, provided that the party reads and agrees  
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-  
cense Agreement.  
License Agreement  
PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT- for U.S.A.  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN  
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER  
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (PIONEER).  
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-  
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON  
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE  
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER  
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY  
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-  
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY  
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (SUPPLIERS),  
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-  
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERSSEPARATE  
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS  
AGREEMENT (Refer to Terms and Conditions  
for the Tele Atlas Data). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE  
WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RE-  
TURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING  
THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERI-  
ALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF  
THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHORIZED  
PIONEER DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PUR-  
CHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE  
SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT  
TO THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.  
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are  
provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-  
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2  
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-  
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND  
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-  
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-  
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and  
may contain some nonconformities, defects or  
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-  
ware will meet your needs or expectations,  
that operation of the Software will be error free  
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warran-  
ties regarding the use or results of the use of  
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability  
or otherwise.  
1
GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed  
on the Pioneer products (the Software) and  
the related documentation solely for your own  
personal use or for internal use by your busi-  
ness, only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the  
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,  
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market  
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in  
any manner not expressly authorized by this  
agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to  
derive the source code or structure of all or  
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-  
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
regulations of the United States. If the Soft-  
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-  
side of the United States, you agree that you  
will not re-export the Software nor any other  
technical data received from Pioneer, nor the  
direct product thereof, except as permitted by  
the laws and regulations of the United States  
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-  
tion in which you obtained the Software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-  
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-  
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR  
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST  
INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-  
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS  
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS  
OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-  
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS  
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD  
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-  
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-  
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-  
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,  
MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS.  
IF PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE  
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT  
PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED  
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY  
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-  
DUCT.  
5
TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated.  
You may terminate it at any time by destroying  
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-  
nate if you do not comply with any terms or  
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-  
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.  
6
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS  
If the Software is being acquired by or on be-  
half of the United States government or any  
other entity seeking or applying rights similar  
to those customarily claimed by the United  
States government, the Data is licensed with  
Limited Rights. Utilization of the Software is  
subject to the restrictions specified in the  
Rights in Technical Dataclause at DFARS  
252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-  
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA)  
Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA  
90810.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-  
itation of incidental or consequential da-  
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer  
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-  
able to the extent that they are prohibited by  
any applicable federal, state or local law which  
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation  
cannot be waived or preempted.  
7
MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No  
change in this Agreement shall be effective  
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer  
retailers do not have the authority to change  
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-  
erned by and construed in accordance with  
the internal laws of the State of California. If  
any provision of this Agreement is declared in-  
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-  
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full  
force and effect.  
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from  
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside the United States except as  
authorized and as permitted by the laws and  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
operate a service bureau or for any other use  
involving the processing of data for other per-  
sons or entities.  
PIONEER AVIC-Z110BT- for Canada  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN  
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER  
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-  
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-  
tary ownership rights in the Software. The  
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-  
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-  
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any  
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-  
tained in or on the Software.  
You may transfer all of your license rights in  
the Software, the related documentation and a  
copy of this License Agreement to another  
party, provided that the party reads and agrees  
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-  
cense Agreement.  
(PIONEER). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-  
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-  
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY  
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE  
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE  
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-  
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-  
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER  
(S) (SUPPLIERS), AND YOUR USE OF THE  
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’  
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED  
TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 14). IF  
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE  
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-  
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND  
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)  
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO  
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM  
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF  
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE  
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-  
MENT.  
2
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY  
The Software and related documentation are  
provided to you AS IS. PIONEER AND ITS LI-  
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2  
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-  
lectively referred to as Pioneer) MAKES AND  
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-  
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-  
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and  
may contain some nonconformities, defects or  
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-  
ware will meet your needs or expectations,  
that operation of the Software will be error free  
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities  
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer  
does not make any representations or warran-  
ties regarding the use or results of the use of  
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability  
or otherwise.  
1
GRANT OF LICENSE  
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non  
exclusive license to use the software installed  
on the Pioneer products (the Software) and  
the related documentation solely for your own  
personal use or for internal use by your busi-  
ness, only on such Pioneer products.  
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,  
port, modify or make derivative works of the  
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,  
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market  
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in  
any manner not expressly authorized by this  
agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to  
derive, the source code or structure of all or  
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-  
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any  
other means. You shall not use the Software to  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
3
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree  
that you will not re-export the Software nor any  
other technical data received from Pioneer,  
nor the direct product thereof, except as per-  
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada  
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-  
tion in which you obtained the Software.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-  
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-  
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR  
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST  
SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-  
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-  
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF  
ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING  
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS  
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD  
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF  
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES  
TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-  
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION  
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-  
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-  
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF  
PIONEERS WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS  
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON  
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE  
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT  
PIONEERS LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED  
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY  
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-  
DUCT.  
5
TERMINATION  
This Agreement is effective until terminated.  
You may terminate it at any time by destroying  
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-  
nate if you do not comply with any terms or  
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-  
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.  
6
MISCELLANEOUS  
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer  
and you regarding its subject matter. No  
change in this Agreement shall be effective  
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer  
retailers do not have the authority to change  
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-  
erned by and construed in accordance with  
the internal laws of the Province of Ontario  
and the federal laws of Canada applicable  
therein. If any provision of this Agreement is  
declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-  
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain  
in full force and effect.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-  
itation of incidental or consequential da-  
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion  
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer  
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-  
able to the extent that they are prohibited by  
any applicable federal, state or local law which  
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation  
cannot be waived or preempted.  
4
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES  
You agree and certify that neither the Software  
nor any other technical data received from  
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be  
exported outside Canada except as authorized  
and as permitted by the laws and regulations  
of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-  
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A  
Terms and Conditions for the  
Tele Atlas Data  
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE AGREE-  
MENT) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND  
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (Tele  
Atlas). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE  
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-  
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED  
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-  
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS  
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE  
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-  
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER  
OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-  
TION OF THE AGREEMENT.  
1
Grant of License.  
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-  
exclusive license to use the map data and  
business points of interest information (the  
POIs), (together, the Data) contained on  
these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-  
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or  
for any other use involving the processing of  
data of other persons or entities. You may  
make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or  
backup purposes only but you may not other-  
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative  
works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-  
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential  
and proprietary information and materials,  
and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to  
hold the Data in confidence and in trust and  
not to disclose the Data or any portions in any  
form, including by renting, leasing, publish-  
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the  
Data to any third party. You are prohibited  
from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-  
demark notice or restrictive legend.  
4
Limitation of Liability.  
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU  
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,  
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-  
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,  
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF  
COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-  
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF  
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-  
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-  
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY  
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL  
HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR  
ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF  
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS  
AGREEMENT.  
5
Termination.  
This Agreement will terminate immediately  
and automatically, without notice, if you  
breach any term of this Agreement. You agree  
that in the event of termination of the Agree-  
ment, you shall return the Data (including all  
documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas  
and its suppliers.  
2
Ownership.  
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-  
censors and they retain all ownership rights in  
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-  
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-  
prietary legend contained in or on the Data.  
3
Warranty Disclaimer.  
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN AS ISAND  
WITH ALL FAULTS BASISAND TELE ATLAS  
AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM  
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-  
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
6
Indemnity.  
it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and  
a proprietary commercial product and not sub-  
ject to disclosure.  
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele  
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-  
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-  
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies,  
and the respective officers, directors, employ-  
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives)  
free and harmless from and against any liabili-  
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in  
death), demand, action, cost, expense, or  
claim of any kind or character, including but  
not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or  
in connection with any use or possession by  
you of the Data.  
If you are an agency, department, or other en-  
tity of any State government, the United States  
Government or any other public entity or  
funded in whole or in part by the United States  
Government, then you hereby agree to protect  
the Data from public disclosure and to consid-  
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-  
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act,  
Public Records Act, Freedom of Information  
Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-  
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data.  
In the event that such exemption is challenged  
under any such laws, this Agreement shall be  
considered breached and any and all right to  
retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be  
terminated and considered immediately null  
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you  
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of  
competent jurisdiction considers this clause  
void and unenforceable, in whole or in part,  
for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-  
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-  
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall  
immediately be destroyed.  
7
U.S. Government Rights.  
If you are an agency, department, or other en-  
tity of the United States Government, or  
funded in whole or in part by the United States  
Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-  
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-  
fer of this commercial product and  
accompanying documentation, is restricted in  
accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED  
rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)  
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer  
software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD  
policy on commercial computer software),  
FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-  
puter software clause for civilian agencies),  
DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-  
cal data commercial items clause); FAR  
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-  
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-  
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR  
12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-  
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict  
between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions  
listed herein and this License, the construc-  
tion that provides greater limitations on the  
Governments rights shall control. Contractor/  
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America,  
Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-  
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is  
8
Additional Provisions with respect to  
POI Data only.  
a
b
c
No Creation of Mailing Lists.  
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to  
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-  
milar uses.  
Compliance.  
You will use the POIs in compliance with all  
applicable federal, state and local laws,  
rules and regulations.  
Indemnification.  
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.  
harmless against all third party claims or  
liability which are based in whole or in part  
of the users failure to comply with such  
laws, rules and regulations or which result  
from the use of the POIs through you.  
Warranty.  
©1984-2008 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-  
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure  
provision under any federal, state or local law,  
d
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
In addition to the Warranties contained in  
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT  
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN AS IS”  
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND  
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES  
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
or unenforceable, such provision or part there-  
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and  
the remainder of this Agreement shall be  
valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum  
extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-  
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas  
North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-  
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH  
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-  
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-  
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced  
by Tele Atlas directly against you.  
e
POIs Segregation.  
You are prohibited from combining or mer-  
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The  
POIs shall be maintained in such a way  
that they are separately identifiable from all  
other POI data at all times.  
9
Agreement in English.  
The parties hereto confirm that they have re-  
quested that this Agreement and all attach-  
ments and related documents be drafted in  
English.  
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et  
tous les documents attachés soient rédigés en  
Anglais.  
10 Miscellaneous.  
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement  
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-  
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall  
create a joint venture, partnership or principal-  
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you.  
The internal laws of California shall govern  
this Agreement and you consent to the juris-  
diction of the Northern District of California or  
the State of California for the County of Santa  
Clara. Sections 2 10 shall survive the expira-  
tion or termination of this Agreement. This  
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-  
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any  
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlasprior  
written consent. You acknowledge and under-  
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-  
tions on exportation and agree to comply with  
any applicable export laws. In the event that  
any provision or part of a provision of this  
Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal,  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
Licenses  
01  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Copyright Notices for North  
American data  
About the database  
About the Data for the Map  
Database  
1
Tele Atlasâ MultiNetâ USA and Canada data.  
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
for Tele Atlasâ MultiNetâ USA and Canada is:  
NOTICE  
!
Modifications related to roads, streets/high-  
ways, terrain, construction and other things  
before/during the development period may  
not be reflected in this database. Inevitably,  
those modifications after that period are  
not reflected in this database.  
ã 2006 2008 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.  
This material is proprietary and the subject of  
copyright protection and other intellectual  
property rights owned or licensed to Tele  
Atlas. Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of  
selected Statistics Canada computer files  
under Agreement number 6776. The product  
includes information copied with permission  
from Canadian authorities, including ã Cana-  
da Post Corporation and GeoBaseâ, and De-  
partment of Natural Resources Canada, All  
rights reserved. The product is sourced in part  
from Geography Division, Statistics Canada,  
2006 Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/  
XWF. The incorporation of data sources from  
Statistics Canada within this product shall not  
be construed as constituting an endorsement  
by Statistics Canada of such product. The use  
of this material is subject to the terms of a Li-  
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for  
any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this  
material.  
!
!
For more details about the map coverage of  
this navigation system, refer to the informa-  
tion on our website.  
It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use  
any part or the whole of this map in any  
form without permission from the copyright  
owner.  
!
!
If the local traffic regulations or conditions  
deviate from this data, follow the local traf-  
fic regulations (such as signs, indications,  
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,  
weather, etc.).  
The traffic regulation data used in the map  
database applies only to standard sized  
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations  
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other  
non-standard vehicles are not included in  
the database.  
2
3
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
for all third-party brand icons (the Brand  
Icons) are located in the operators manual  
included in the Licensed Products.  
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice  
with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:  
Data by  
C
Copyright 2009  
All Rights Reserved  
4
As for Map Version, Tele Atlas. Rel. 07/2008.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
morning only, but you arrive later, it would be  
against the traffic regulations so you cannot  
drive along the set route. When driving, please  
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system  
may not know some traffic regulations.  
Important Safety Information  
WARNING  
!
Do not attempt to install or service your navi-  
gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-  
cing of the navigation system by persons  
without training and experience in electronic  
equipment and automotive accessories may  
be dangerous and could expose you to the  
risk of electric shock or other hazards.  
Before using your navigation system, be sure  
to read and fully understand the following  
safety information:  
p Read the entire manual before operating  
this navigation system.  
!
If liquid or foreign matter should get inside  
this navigation system, park your vehicle to  
safe place and turn the ignition switch off  
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-  
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service  
Station. Do not use the navigation system in  
this condition because doing so may result in  
a fire, electric shock, or other failure.  
p The navigation features of your navigation  
system (and rear view camera option if pur-  
chased) are intended solely as an aid to  
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is  
not a substitute for your attentiveness,  
judgment, and care when driving.  
p Do not operate this navigation system (or  
the rear view camera option if purchased) if  
doing so will divert your attention in any  
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.  
Always observe safe driving rules and fol-  
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-  
perience difficulty in operating the system  
or reading the display, park your vehicle in  
a safe location and apply the parking brake  
before making the necessary adjustments.  
p Never allow others to use the system un-  
less they have read and understood the op-  
erating instructions.  
p Never use this navigation system to route  
to hospitals, police stations or similar facil-  
ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-  
tions relating to the hands-free phone and  
please call 911.  
p Route and guidance information displayed  
by this equipment is for reference purposes  
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest  
permissible routes, road conditions, one  
way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-  
tions.  
!
If you notice smoke, a strange noise or odor  
from the navigation system, or any other ab-  
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the  
power immediately and consult your dealer or  
the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-  
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-  
dition may result in permanent damage to the  
system.  
!
!
Do not disassemble or modify this navigation  
system, as there are high-voltage components  
inside which may cause an electric shock. Be  
sure to consult your dealer or the nearest  
authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal  
inspection, adjustments or repairs.  
Do not allow this product to come into contact  
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.  
Also, damage to the product, smoke, and over-  
heating could result from contact with liquids.  
CAUTION  
!
When a route is calculated, the route and  
voice guidance for the route are automatically  
set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,  
only information about traffic regulations ap-  
plicable at the time when the route was calcu-  
lated is shown. One-way streets and street  
closures may not be taken into consideration.  
For example, if a street is open during the  
p Traffic restrictions and advisories currently  
in force should always take precedence  
over guidance given by the navigation sys-  
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-  
tions, even if the navigation system  
provides contrary advice.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
p Failure to set correct information about the  
local time may result in the navigation sys-  
tem providing improper routing and gui-  
dance instructions.  
p Never set the volume of your navigation  
system so high that you cannot hear out-  
side traffic and emergency vehicles.  
p To promote safety, certain functions are dis-  
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or  
the parking brake is applied.  
p The data encoded in the built-in memory is  
the intellectual property of the provider, and  
the provider is responsible for such con-  
tent.  
p Keep this manual handy as a reference for  
operating procedures and safety informa-  
tion.  
Additional Safety Information  
Parking brake interlock  
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-  
Video and certain touch key operations) of-  
fered by this navigation system could be dan-  
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving.  
To prevent such functions from being used  
while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-  
lock system that senses when the parking  
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If  
you attempt to use the functions described  
above while driving, they will become disabled  
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and  
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake  
pedal pushed down before releasing the park-  
ing brake.  
p Pay close attention to all warnings in this  
manual and follow the instructions care-  
fully.  
p Do not install this navigation system where  
it may (i) obstruct the drivers vision, (ii) im-  
pair the performance of any of the vehicles  
operating systems or safety features, in-  
cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or  
(iii) impair the drivers ability to safely oper-  
ate the vehicle.  
p Please remember to fasten your seat belt at  
all times while operating your vehicle. If  
you are ever in an accident, your injuries  
can be considerably more severe if your  
seat belt is not properly buckled.  
WARNING  
!
LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-  
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT  
PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-  
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE  
OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-  
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF  
THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE  
LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-  
JURY OR DAMAGE.  
!
!
To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the  
potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-  
gation system is not for use with a Video  
imagethat is visible to the driver.  
In some countries or states the viewing of  
Video imageon a display inside a vehicle  
even by persons other than the driver may be  
illegal. Where such regulations apply, they  
must be obeyed.  
When applying the parking brake in order to  
view Video imageor to enable other func-  
tions offered by the navigation system, park  
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the  
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the  
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill  
or otherwise might move when releasing the  
parking brake.  
p Never use headphones while driving.  
GOOG-411service  
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the  
accuracy of the information.  
p Pioneer does not bear responsibility for  
changes to information services provided  
by related companies, such as cancellation  
of services or changing to pay-services.  
Also, we do not accept return of the pro-  
duct for this reason.  
!
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-  
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detection  
and driving habits or conditions of the place  
where the vehicle is parked.  
!
!
SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.  
USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR  
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE  
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.  
When you attempt to watch Video image”  
while driving, the warning Viewing of front  
seat video source while driving is strictly  
prohibited.will appear on the screen. To  
watch Video imageon this display, stop the  
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking  
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed  
down before releasing the parking brake.  
CAUTION  
!
!
For safety reasons, the rear view camera func-  
tion is not available until the navigation sys-  
tem boots up completely.  
The rear view mode is to use the navigation  
system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers,  
or while backing up. Do not use this function  
for entertainment purposes.  
When using a display connected  
to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT  
Notes Before Using the System  
Important (Serial Number:)  
The serial number of this device is located on the  
bottom of this product. For your own security and  
convenience, be sure to record this number on  
the enclosed warranty card.  
The video output terminal (REAR MONITOR  
OUTPUT) is for connection of a display to en-  
able passengers in the rear seats to watch  
video images.  
WARNING  
NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that  
enables the driver to watch video images while  
driving.  
Failure to operate  
Should the navigation system fail to operate  
properly, contact your dealer or nearest  
authorized Pioneer Service Station.  
To avoid battery exhaustion  
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using  
this product. Using this product without run-  
ning the engine can drain the battery.  
WARNING  
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an  
ACC position.  
Rear view camera  
With an optional rear view camera, you are  
able to use the navigation system as an aid to  
keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight  
parking spot.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Manual overview  
How to use this manual  
Finding the operation procedure for  
what you want to do  
When you have decided what you want to do,  
you can find the page you need from the  
Contents.  
After-sales service for Pioneer products  
Please contact the dealer or distributor from  
which you purchased the product for after-  
sales service (including warranty conditions)  
or any other information. In case the necessary  
information is not available, please contact the  
companies listed below.  
Please do not ship your product to the compa-  
nies at the addresses listed below for repair  
without making advance contact.  
Finding the operation procedure from  
a menu name  
If you want to check the meaning of an item  
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-  
cessary page from the Display informationat  
the end of the manual.  
!
U.S.A  
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.  
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION  
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760  
800-421-1404  
!
CANADA  
Glossary  
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.  
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT  
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario  
L3R 0P2  
Use the glossary to find the meanings of  
terms.  
Terminology  
1-877-283-5901  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read  
the following information about the conven-  
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with  
these conventions will help you greatly as you  
learn how to use your new equipment.  
905-479-4411  
For warranty information, please see the Lim-  
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-  
duct.  
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-  
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
Visit Our Web site  
Visit us at the following site:  
MENU button, MAP button.  
Items in different menus, screen titles, and  
functional components are described in  
bold with double quotation marks “ ”:  
e.g.)  
Destination Menuscreen or AV  
Sourcescreen  
Touch panel keys that are available on the  
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:  
e.g.)  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com  
!
In Canada  
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca  
1
Register your product. We will keep the details  
of your purchase on file to help you refer to  
this information in the event of an insurance  
claim such as loss or theft.  
!
!
2
3
Receive updates on the latest products and  
technologies.  
Download owners manuals, order product  
catalogs, research new products, and much  
more.  
[Destination], [Settings].  
Extra information, alternatives and other  
notes are presented in the following for-  
mat:  
4
Receive notices of software upgrades and  
software updates.  
e.g.)  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
!
References are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
= For details, refer to How to use the navi-  
gation menu screens on page 34.  
Notice regarding DVD-  
Video viewing  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims  
of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights owned by Macrovision  
Definitions of terminology  
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of  
this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing  
uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering  
or disassembly is prohibited.  
Front Displayand Rear Display”  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to  
the body of this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the Front Display. Any additional op-  
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-  
junction with this navigation unit will be  
referred to as the Rear Display.  
Video image”  
Notice regarding MP3 file  
usage  
Video imagein this manual indicates mov-  
ing images of DVD-Video, DivXâ, iPod, and any  
equipment that is connected to this system  
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose  
AV equipment.  
Supply of this navigation system conveys only  
a license for private, non-commercial use and  
does not convey a license nor imply any right  
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-  
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-  
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other  
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,  
intranets and/or other networks or in other  
electronic content distribution systems, such  
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-  
tions. An independent license for such use is  
required. For details, please visit  
External storage device (USB, SD)”  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card  
and USB memory device are collectively re-  
ferred to as the external storage device (USB,  
SD). If it indicates the USB memory only, it is  
referred to as the USB storage device.  
SD memory card”  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
The SD memory card and SDHC memory card  
are collectively referred to as the SD memory  
card.  
iPod compatibility  
This product supports only the following iPod  
models and iPod software versions. Others  
may not work correctly.  
Notice regarding video  
viewing  
Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-  
stitute an infringement on the authors rights  
as protected by the Copyright Law.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod nano first generation; Ver. 1.3.1  
iPod nano second generation; Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano third generation; Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano fourth generation; Ver. 1.0.3  
iPod fifth generation; Ver. 1.3  
iPod classic; Ver. 2.0.1  
iPod touch first generation; Ver. 2.2.1  
iPod touch second generation; Ver. 2.2.1  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
!
!
iPhone; Ver. 2.2.1  
iPhone 3G; Ver. 2.2.1  
Notes on internal memory  
Before removing the vehicle  
battery  
p In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-  
ferred to as iPod.  
p When you use this navigation system with  
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-  
IU50V) (sold separately), you can control an  
iPod compatible with this navigation sys-  
tem.  
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-  
commend that you use the latest software  
for the iPod.  
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,  
the memory will be erased and must be repro-  
gramed.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items which would be erased, refer to  
p Operation methods may vary depending on  
the iPod models and the software version  
of iPod.  
p For more details about iPod compatibility  
with this navigation system, refer to the in-  
formation on our website.  
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
p iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
Data subject to erasure  
The information is erased by disconnecting  
the yellow lead from the battery (or removing  
the battery itself). However, some items re-  
main.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items which would be erased, refer to  
Map coverage  
For more details about the map coverage of  
this navigation system, refer to the information  
on our website.  
Protecting the LCD panel  
and screen  
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the  
LCD screen when this product is not being  
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight  
can result in LCD screen malfunction due  
to the resulting high temperatures.  
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,  
etc.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger and gently touch the screen.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
Checking part names and functions  
This chapter gives information about the  
names of the parts and the main features  
using the buttons.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
1 LCD screen  
2 OPEN CLOSE button  
3 TRK (c/d) button  
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast  
forward, reverse and track search controls.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
= For more details, refer to the descriptions  
Adjusting the LCD panel angle  
from Chapter 14 to Chapter 30.  
WARNING  
4 MODE button  
When opening, closing and adjusting the angle  
of the LCD panel, be careful not to get your finger  
caught.  
!
Press to switch between the map screen  
and the AV operation screen.  
Press to display the map screen while  
the navigation function screen is dis-  
played.  
!
CAUTION  
Do not open and close the LCD panel with hands  
by force. This may cause malfunction.  
!
Press and hold to display the Picture  
Adjustmentscreen.  
= For details, refer to Operating the pic-  
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The Monitor Setupscreen appears.  
5 HOME button  
!
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
!
Press to switch between the Classic  
Menuand the Shortcut Menuwhile  
the Top Menuis displayed.  
Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-  
play.  
!
6 VOL (+/) button  
Adjusts the AV (Audio and Video) source vo-  
lume.  
2
3
Touch  
Touch  
or  
.
to adjust the angle.  
p The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be  
memorized and the LCD panel will automa-  
tically return to that angle the next time the  
LCD panel is opened or closed.  
7 VOICE button  
Press the VOICE button to activate voice op-  
erations.  
Press and hold the VOICE button to switch  
the AV source to mute.  
Inserting and ejecting a disc  
8 Disc loading slot  
Insert a disc to play.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
WARNING  
!
!
When opening, closing and adjusting the  
angle of the LCD panel, be careful not to get  
your finger caught.  
9 SD card slot  
Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If  
LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury  
in the event of an accident.  
= For more detailed information, refer to In-  
CAUTION  
Do not open and close the LCD panel with  
hands by force. This may cause malfunction.  
!
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
!
!
Do not operate this navigation system until  
the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If  
this navigation system is operated while the  
LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD  
panel may stop at that angle for safety.  
Do not place a glass or a can on this naviga-  
tion system when the LCD panel is open.  
Doing so may break this navigation system.  
Ejecting a disc  
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The Monitor Setupscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Disc Eject].  
The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected.  
3
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The LCD panel closes.  
Inserting a disc  
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card  
The Monitor Setupscreen appears.  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
2
Touch [Open].  
The LCD panel opens, and the disc loading  
slot appears.  
!
!
Do not press the OPEN CLOSE button when  
the SD memory card is not fully inserted.  
Doing so may damage the card.  
Do not press the OPEN CLOSE button before  
the SD memory card has been completely re-  
moved. Doing so may damage the card.  
Press the middle of the SD memory card  
gently and pull out straight.  
3
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.  
p This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is  
not guaranteed.  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some SD memory cards.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc loading slot.  
Inserting an SD memory card  
4
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The LCD panel closes.  
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The Monitor Setupscreen appears.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
2
Touch [SD Insert].  
2
Touch [Eject SD].  
The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-  
pears.  
The following message appears.  
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
Insert it with the label surface facing to the up-  
side and press the card until it clicks and com-  
pletely locks.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
The navigation system restarts, and then the  
LCD panel opens.  
4
5
6
Press the SD memory card until it clicks.  
Pull out the SD memory card.  
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The LCD panel closes, and then the navigation  
system restarts.  
4
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The LCD panel closes, and then the navigation  
system restarts.  
p If the SD memory card only contains music  
files or video files, the navigation system  
will not be restarted.  
Plugging and unplugging a  
USB storage device  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Ejecting an SD memory card  
1
Press the OPEN CLOSE button.  
The Monitor Setupscreen appears.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)  
Plugging in a USB storage device  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
%
Plug a USB storage device into the USB  
connector.  
1
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
USB connector  
USB storage device  
p Compatibility with all USB storage device is  
not guaranteed.  
This navigation system may not achieve op-  
timum performance with some USB sto-  
rage devices.  
USB connector  
USB interface cable  
for iPod  
p Connection via USB hub is not possible.  
p For more details about iPod compatibility  
with this navigation system, refer to the in-  
formation on our website.  
Unplugging a USB storage device  
p Connection via USB hub is not possible.  
%
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
2
Connect your iPod.  
Connecting and  
Disconnecting your iPod  
disconnecting an iPod  
%
Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod  
after checking that no data is being ac-  
cessed.  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Flow from startup to  
termination  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger and gently touch the screen.  
Connecting your iPod  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
2
Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-  
4
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking  
nate the system.  
The navigation system is also turned off.  
its details, and then touch [OK] if you  
agree to the conditions.  
On first-time startup  
When you use the navigation system for the  
first time, select the language that you want to  
use.  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
2
Touch the language that you want to  
use on the screen.  
3
Touch the language that you want to  
Regular startup  
use for the voice guidance.  
%
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
p The screen shown will differ depending on  
the previous conditions.  
p When there is no route, the disclaimer ap-  
pears after the navigation system reboots.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
The navigation system will now restart.  
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you  
must enter your password.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
03  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
Screen switching overview  
4
2
3
1
5
7
6
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
03  
Press the MODE button to display the naviga-  
tion map screen.  
7 AV operation screen  
What you can do on each  
menu  
1 Top Menu  
This is the screen that normally appears when  
you play the AV source. Touching the icon on  
the top left corner displays the AV Source”  
menu.  
Press the HOME button to display the Top  
Menu.  
This is the starting menu to access the desired  
screens and operate the various functions.  
There are two types of the Top Menu.  
p To return to the previous screen, touch  
.
Operating list screens (e.g.  
POI list)  
1
4
5
2
3
Classic Menu  
1 Screen title  
2
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls  
through the list and allows you to view the re-  
maining items.  
Shortcut Menu  
3
Returns the previous screen.  
4 Listed items  
p In this manual, Classic Menuwill be  
referred to as Top Menu.  
2 Destination Menu  
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-  
row down the options and proceed to the next  
operation.  
You can search for your destination on this  
menu. You can also check or cancel your set  
route from this menu.  
5
If all of the characters cannot be displayed  
within the displayed area, touching the key to  
the right of the item allows you to see remain-  
ing characters.  
3 Phone Menu  
You can access the screen that is related to  
hands-free phoning to see call histories and  
change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
4 AV Source menu  
Shortcut menu  
You can access the screen for selecting the  
audio and visual source to play.  
5 Settings Menu  
You can access the screen to customize set-  
tings.  
6 Map screen  
Registering your favorite menu items in short-  
cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-  
tered menu screen by a simple touch on the  
Shortcut Menuscreen.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
Selecting the Shortcut  
p Up to 15 menu items can be registered in  
Displaying the rear view  
camera image  
Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand  
side of the screen, while the map of your sur-  
roundings is indicated on the right.  
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view  
shortcuts.  
1
Press the HOME button repeatedly to  
display the Shortcut Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Shortcut].  
The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
3
Touch [System Settings].  
The System Settingsscreen appears.  
4
Touch [Back Camera].  
Scroll bar  
The Back Camera Settingsscreen appears.  
3
Touch the tab on the right edge or scroll  
5
Touch [Camera] to turn it [On].  
the bar to display the icon that you want  
to set to shortcut.  
4
Touch and hold the icon that you want  
to add to shortcut.  
5
Move the icon to the left side of the  
screen, and then release it.  
The selected item is added to shortcut.  
Canceling the Shortcut  
1
Touch and hold the icon that you want  
to cancel the shortcut.  
2
Move the icon to the right side of the  
screen, and then release it.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-  
come familiar with how information appears on the map.  
How to read the map screen  
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.  
1
h
g
f
2
e
d
c
b
3
4
5
6
a
7
8
9
p Information with the mark (*) appears only  
when the route is set.  
p Touching this item enables you to hear  
the next guidance again.  
p Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-  
dance point)*  
2 Next direction of travel*  
When you approach a guidance point, this  
item appears.  
4 Second Maneuver Arrow*  
Shows the turning direction after next and the  
distance to there.  
= For details, refer to Displaying maneu-  
5 Zoom in/Zoom out  
Touching  
displays touch panel keys for  
As you get closer to the guidance point, the  
color of the item changes to green.  
p Touching this item enables you to hear  
the next guidance again.  
p You can select between display and  
non-display.  
changing the map scale and the map orienta-  
tion.  
6 Current position  
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.  
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your  
orientation and the display moves automati-  
cally as you drive.  
p The apex of the triangular mark is the  
proper current position.  
= For details, refer to Displaying man-  
3 Distance to the guidance point*  
Shows the distance to the next guidance  
point.  
7 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-  
cle is traveling along  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
= For details, refer to Setting the current  
!
!
Estimated time of arrival at your des-  
tination or waypoint*  
8 Extension tab for the AV information bar  
Touching this tab opens the AV information  
bar and enables you to briefly view the current  
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-  
tracts the bar.  
9 Shortcut to the AV operation screen  
The AV Source currently selected is shown.  
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-  
tion screen of the current source directly.  
p If you connect your iPod to this naviga-  
tion system, the artwork for the album  
that is playing appears.  
The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value calculated based on the value set  
for [Speed] and the actual driving  
speed. The estimated time of arrival is  
only a reference value, and does not  
guarantee arrival at that time.  
Travel time to your destination or  
waypoint*  
h Current time  
Meaning of guidance flags  
: Destination  
a Quick Access icon  
Displays Quick Access menu.  
b Map orientation indicator  
The checkered flag indicates your  
destination.  
: Waypoint  
The blue flags indicate your way-  
points.  
: Guidance point  
The next guidance point (next turn-  
ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-  
low flag.  
!
When North upis selected, is dis-  
played.  
!
When Heading upis selected,  
displayed.  
is  
p The red arrow indicates north.  
c Current route*  
The route currently set is highlighted in bright  
color on the map. If a waypoint is set on the  
route, the route after the next waypoint is  
highlighted in another color.  
Displaying the AV information bar  
You can check the current status on the se-  
lected AV source.  
d Direction line*  
%
Touch  
.
The direction towards your destination (next  
waypoint, or cursor) is indicated with a  
straight line.  
AV information bar appears.  
e Voice icon  
This icon shows when the voice operation is  
active.  
f Bluetooth Connected icon  
This icon shows whether the device featuring  
Bluetooth technology is connected or not. You  
can select between display and non-display.  
= For more details about Selecting dis-  
play or non-display for the Bluetooth  
Connected icon, refer to Bluetooth  
#
Touch the AV information bar.  
The AV information bar is retracted.  
g Multi-Info window  
Each touch of [Multi-Info window] changes  
the display information.  
!
Distance to the destination (or dis-  
tance to waypoint)*  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
2 Freeway exit information  
Displays the freeway exit.  
3 Freeway signs  
Enlarged map of the intersection  
When Close Up Viewin the Map Settings”  
screen is On, an enlarged map of the inter-  
section appears.  
These show the road number and give direc-  
tional information.  
p If the data for these items is not contained  
in the built-in memory, the information is  
not available even if there are the signs on  
the actual road.  
Operating the map screen  
Changing the scale of the map  
You can change the map scale between 25  
yard and 1 000 miles (25 meters and 2 000 kilo-  
meters).  
= For details, refer to Setting Close Up  
Display during freeway driving  
1
2
Display the map screen.  
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-  
mation is available, indicating the recom-  
mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the  
next guidance.  
Touch  
on the map screen.  
with the map scale appear.  
and  
1
3
Touch  
or  
to change the map  
scale.  
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit  
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed  
when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.  
p If you do not operate the function for a few  
seconds, the display is automatically re-  
turned.  
2
3
#
Touch the direct scale key to change the map  
to the selected scale directly.  
Switching the map orientation  
You can switch the vehicles direction on the  
map between Heading upand North up.  
!
Heading up:  
1 Lane information  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
The map display always shows the vehicles  
direction as proceeding toward the top of  
the screen.  
2
Touch and drag the map in the desired  
direction to scroll.  
!
North up:  
The map display always has north at the  
top of the screen.  
p The map orientation is fixed at North up”  
in the following situation.  
1
When the map scale is 25 miles (50 kilo-  
meters) or more.  
p The map orientation is fixed at Heading  
upin the following situation.  
2
1 Cursor  
When the 3D map screen is displayed.  
2 Distance from the current position  
Positioning the cursor to the desired location  
results in a brief informational overview about  
the location being displayed at the bottom of  
screen, with street name and other informa-  
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-  
mation shown varies depending on the  
position.)  
1
2
Display the map screen.  
Touch  
on the map screen.  
or  
appears.  
p The scrolling increment depends on your  
dragging length.  
#
Touch  
.
The map returns to the current position.  
p Pressing MODE button returns the map to  
the current position.  
3
Touch  
or  
to switch the vehicles  
Quick Access  
direction.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Quick Accessallow you to perform various  
tasks, such as route calculation for the loca-  
tion indicated by the scroll cursor or register-  
ing a location in [Favorites], faster than using  
the navigation menu.  
p If you do not operate the function for a few  
seconds, the display is automatically re-  
turned.  
You can customize Quick Accessdisplayed  
on screen. The Quick Accessdescribed here  
are prepared as the default setting.  
= For details, refer to Selecting Quick Ac-  
Scrolling the map to the  
position you want to see  
1
Display the map screen.  
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot  
be removed from Quick Access menu.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the  
%
When the map is displayed, touch  
.
[Close]  
Hides the Quick Access menu.  
Quick Access menu  
: Route Options*  
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This  
item can be selected only during route gui-  
dance.  
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-  
lation and recalculate the current route.  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route cal-  
: Destination*  
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the  
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-  
sor.  
: Registration  
Register information on the location indicated  
by the scroll cursor to Favorites.  
= For details, refer to Registering a location by  
: Vicinity Search  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of  
the scroll cursor.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby  
: Overlay POI  
Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)  
on the map.  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
: Volume  
Displays the Volume Settingsscreen.  
= For more details about Volume, refer to  
: Contacts  
Displays the Contacts Listscreen.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
05  
Customizing the map screen settings  
The general settings related with a map screen  
can be customized.  
To customize the map screen, display the  
Map Settingsscreen.  
Setting Close Up View”  
This setting enables switching to an enlarged  
map around the point where your vehicle is  
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of  
freeway or a junction.  
1
Display the Top Menuscreen.  
%
Touch [Close Up View].  
2
Touch [Settings].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
!
[On] (default):  
Switches to an enlarged map.  
Displays the close up view with the 2D map.  
[Off]:  
!
Does not switch to an enlarged map.  
City Map  
You can select whether to display the city map  
when in certain metropolitan city areas.  
p The city map is displayed when the map  
scale is 0.05 mile (50 meters) or less.  
3
Touch [Map Settings].  
The Map Settingsscreen appears.  
%
Touch [City Map].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
[On] (default):  
Automatically switches to the city map  
when in a city map area.  
[Off]:  
Does not show the city map.  
p Even if you switch [City Map] to [On],  
city map cannot display in areas where  
there is no city map data.  
Setting the Item on the  
Map Screen  
1
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
Setting the switching of the  
city map display  
Sets whether to switch to the city map display  
when the vehicle is within a city map area.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The Displayed Informationscreen appears.  
%
Touch [City Map Barrier].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[On] (default):  
Displays a city map when the vehicle enters  
the area of the city map.  
[Off]:  
!
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the map screen settings  
05  
Displays a city map when the area dis-  
played on the map falls entirely within the  
city map area.  
%
Touch [Current Street Name].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[View] (default):  
Displays the street name (or city name) on  
the map.  
Show Traffic Incident  
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic  
notification icons on the map when incidents  
occur on your route.  
!
[Hide]:  
Hides the street name (or city name) on the  
map.  
%
Touch [Show Traffic Incident].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Setting the Favorites icon display  
You can select whether to display the Favor-  
itesicon on the map.  
p Favorites icons are displayed when the  
map scale is 10 mile (20 kilometers) or less.  
!
[View] (default):  
Displays the icons on the map.  
[Hide]:  
!
Hides the icons on the map.  
= For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-  
%
Touch [Favorites Icon].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
[On] (default):  
Displays the Favoritesicon on the map.  
[Off]:  
Bluetooth Connected  
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for  
current status of the phone connection via  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Hides the Favoritesicon on the map.  
%
Touch [Bluetooth Connected].  
3D Land Mark  
You can select whether to display the 3D Land-  
mark on the map.  
p 3D Landmark only appears when the view  
mode is [3D View] and the map scale is  
set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[View] (default):  
Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on  
the map.  
[Hide]:  
!
Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on  
the map.  
%
Touch [3D Land Mark].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
= For more details about Bluetooth Con-  
nected icon, refer to Bluetooth Con-  
ting.  
!
!
[On] (default):  
Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.  
[Off]:  
Hides the 3D Landmark on the map.  
Setting the current street name  
display  
Selects whether to display or hide the street  
name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-  
ing along.  
Displaying maneuvers  
Selects whether to display or hide the next  
turn ahead of the vehicle on the map.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Customizing the map screen settings  
%
Touch [Show Manuever].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[View] (default):  
Displays the next turn ahead of the vehicle  
on the map.  
!
[Hide]:  
Hides the next turn ahead of the vehicle on  
the map.  
3
4
Touch [Display] to turn it [On].  
p If you do not want to display the POI icon  
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].  
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI  
selection setting is retained.)  
MSN Direct  
Selects whether to display or hide the received  
MSN Direct information on the map.  
p Following informations are displayed:  
Gas Prices  
Touch [POI].  
The Overlay POI (Main Category)screen  
appears.  
Movie Times  
Local Events  
p MSN Direct icons are not displayed when  
the map scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometers) or  
more.  
%
Touch [MSN Direct].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[On] (default):  
Displays the icons on the map.  
[Off]:  
Hides the icons on the map.  
!
5
play.  
Touch the category you want to dis-  
A list of subcategories under the selected  
main category appears.  
Displaying POI on the map  
Displays icons for the surrounding facilities  
(POI) on the map.  
p POI icons are not displayed when the map  
scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometers) or more.  
Displaying preinstalled POIs on  
the map  
p You can select up to 10 items from the de-  
#
Touch [OK].  
Returns previous screen.  
tailed category.  
6
Touch the subcategory.  
1
2
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
A red check mark appears next to the selected  
category. To cancel the selection, touch the  
entry again.  
Touch [Overlay POI].  
The Overlay POIscreen appears.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the map screen settings  
05  
#
If you want to search with more detailed cate-  
gories, touch [Detail].  
Touch the item and touch [OK]. When only a few  
types of the detailed categories are selected, blue  
check marks will appear.  
4
5
Touch [Display] to turn it [On].  
p If you do not want to display the POI icon  
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].  
(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI  
selection setting is retained.)  
p When subcategory is selected, [Detail] is  
Touch [Custom POI].  
not available.  
The list of POI categories appears.  
7
Touch [OK].  
Returns previous screen.  
8
To finish the selection, touch [OK].  
Displaying the customized POIs  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDSwhich  
is available separately, on your PC. (AVIC  
FEEDSwill be available on our website.) Stor-  
ing the customized POI properly and inserting  
the SD memory card enables the system to  
display the icons on the map screen.  
p You can select up to 10 items from the de-  
tailed category.  
6
play.  
Touch the category you want to dis-  
7
To finish the selection, touch [OK].  
Switching the view mode  
Various types of screen displays can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
2D map screen  
2
3
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
Touch [Overlay POI].  
The Overlay POIscreen appears.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Customizing the map screen settings  
p This type is available when [Back Cam-  
3D map screen  
Street View  
Rear View  
era Settings] is set to [On].  
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view  
Setting the map color change  
between day and night  
To improve the visibility of the map during the  
evening, you can set the timing for changing  
the combination of the map color.  
1
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Day/Night Display].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[Automatic] (default):  
You can change the colors of a map be-  
tween daytime and nighttime according to  
whether the vehicle lights are On or Off.  
[Day]:  
!
The map is always displayed with daytime  
colors.  
p To use this function with [Automatic], the  
Orange/white lead of the navigation system  
must be connected correctly.  
1
2
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
Changing the road color  
You can set the road color to bluish or reddish.  
Touch [View Mode].  
The View Modescreen appears.  
1
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
3
Touch the type that you want to set.  
2
Touch [Road Color].  
You can select the following types:  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
!
[2D View] (default):  
Displays the 2D map screen.  
[3D View]:  
Displays the 3D map screen.  
[Street View]:  
!
[Blue] (default):  
Changes to blue based road colors.  
[Red]:  
!
Changes to red based road colors.  
Displays the Street Viewscreen.  
p This type is available when the route is  
set.  
!
[Rear View]:  
Displays the rear view images.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing the map screen settings  
05  
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby  
: Overlay POI*  
Displays icon for surrounding facilities  
(POI) on the map.  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
Changing the setting of  
navigation interruption screen  
Set whether to automatically switch to the na-  
vigation screen from the AV operation screen  
when your vehicle approaches a guidance  
point such as an intersection while displaying  
a screen other than navigation.  
!
!
!
: Volume*  
Displays the Volume Settingsscreen.  
= For more details about Volume, refer  
1
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [AV Guide Mode].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
: Contacts*  
Displays the Contacts Listscreen.  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in  
: Whole Route Overview  
Displays the entire route (currently set).  
= For details, refer to Chapter 7.  
: Stock Info  
!
[On] (default):  
Switches from the audio operation screen  
to the navigation screen.  
[Off]:  
!
!
!
Does not switch the screen.  
Displays stock prices.  
= For details, refer to Browsing stock  
: Traffic On Route  
Displays a list of traffic information on the  
route.  
= For details, refer to Checking traffic infor-  
: Traffic Events  
Displays a list of traffic events information.  
= For details, refer to Viewing the traffic  
Selecting Quick Access”  
Select items to display on the map screen. In  
the list displayed on screen, the items with red  
checks are displayed on the map screen.  
Touch the item you want to display and then  
touch [OK] when a red check appears. You  
can select up to five items.  
!
!
!
1
Display the Map Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Quick Access Selection].  
The Quick Access Selectionscreen appears.  
: Day/Night Display  
Switches Day/Night Display setting.  
= For details, refer to Setting the map color  
3
Touch the item that you want to set in  
Quick Access.  
You can select the following items:  
p Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show  
that these are default or factory settings.  
!
: Favorites Icon  
Switches Favorites Icon setting.  
= For details, refer to Setting the Favorites  
!
: Registration*  
Register information on the location indi-  
cated by the scroll cursor to Favorites.  
= For details, refer to Registering a location  
4
To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
!
: Vicinity Search*  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity  
of the scroll cursor.  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Setting a route to your destination  
8
Your navigation system sets the route  
CAUTION  
to your destination, and the map of your  
surroundings appears.  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route.  
9
After releasing the parking brake, drive  
in accordance with navigation guidance.  
p Some information regarding traffic regula-  
tions depends on the time when the route  
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-  
mation may not correspond with a certain  
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes through the location in question.  
Also, the information on the traffic regula-  
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-  
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic  
regulations when driving.  
Checking the location on  
the map  
After searching for the destination, the Loca-  
tion confirmation screenappears.  
Location confirmation screen  
The basic flow of creating  
your route  
%
Touch [OK].  
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and  
The destination is set, and then route calcula-  
apply the parking brake.  
tion starts.  
p If you press MODE button during route cal-  
culation, the calculation is canceled and  
the map display appears.  
2
3
Display the Top Menuscreen.  
Select the method of searching for your  
#
Touch [Scroll].  
destination.  
The map display changes to the scroll mode. You  
can fine-tune the location in the scroll mode, and  
then you can set the location as your destination  
or do various operations.  
Touch [Waypoint].  
The location is added to the Waypoints List”  
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.  
4
Enter the information about your desti-  
nation to calculate route.  
#
5
Confirm the location on the map.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
screen.  
p If a destination is not set, [Waypoint] is not  
available.  
6
The navigation system calculates the  
route to your destination, and then shows  
the route on the map.  
Checking the calculated route  
After the destination is set, route calculation  
starts.  
7
Check and decide the route.  
= For details, refer to Checking the calculated  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a route to your destination  
06  
When the route calculation is completed,  
Route confirmation screenappears.  
Modifying the route  
calculation conditions  
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-  
lation and recalculate the current route.  
Route confirmation screen  
1
Touch [Options] on the Route confir-  
mation screen.  
The Route Optionsscreen appears.  
1
2
3
4
1 Travel time to your destination  
2 Distance to the destination  
3 Estimated fuel cost to your destination  
= For details, refer to Inputting the fuel  
2
Touch the desired items to change the  
route calculation conditions and then  
touch [OK].  
4 Route calculation condition  
The route is recalculated, and Route confir-  
mation screenappears.  
%
Touch [OK].  
Sets the displayed route as your route, and  
starts the route guidance.  
#
Touch  
.
Items that users can operate  
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that  
these are default or factory settings.  
The message confirming whether to cancel the  
calculated route appears.  
Touch [Yes] to cancel the calculated route, and  
then the map screen appears.  
Route Condition  
This setting controls how the route should be  
calculated by taking into account the time or  
the distance or the main road.  
Determines which condition takes priority for  
route calculation.  
Display multiple routes  
You can select a desired route from multiple  
route options. Calculated routes are shown in  
different colors.  
[Fast]*:  
p If you set waypoints, you cannot use the  
multiple route option.  
Calculates a route with the shortest travel time  
to your destination as a priority.  
[Short]:  
Calculates a route with the shortest distance  
to your destination as a priority.  
[Main Road]:  
1
Touch [Multiple Route].  
The Multiple Route Optionscreen appears.  
2
Touch to  
.
Calculate a route that passes major arterial  
road as a priority.  
Another route is displayed.  
3
Touch [OK].  
Route confirmation screenappears.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
06  
Setting a route to your destination  
Avoid Toll Road  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-  
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-  
count.  
cludes streets or bridges that are subject to  
traffic restrictions during a certain time  
even if [On] is selected.  
[Off]*:  
Calculate a route that may include toll roads  
(including toll areas).  
CAUTION  
If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-  
gation system cannot consider traffic regulations  
correctly. Set the time difference correctly (=  
[On]:  
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-  
ing toll areas).  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes toll road even if [On] is selected.  
Learning Route  
The system learns the travel history of your ve-  
hicle for each road.  
This setting controls whether or not the travel  
history should be taken into account.  
[On]*:  
Avoid Ferry  
This setting controls whether ferry crossings  
should be taken into account.  
[Off]*:  
Calculate a route that may include ferries.  
[On]:  
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes ferry way even if [On] is selected.  
Calculate the route with the travel history  
taken into account.  
[Off]:  
Calculate the route without the travel history  
taken into account.  
[Clear]:  
Clear the current travel history.  
Avoid Freeway  
This setting controls whether freeways may be  
included in the route calculation.  
[Off]*:  
Calculate a route that may include freeways.  
[On]:  
Checking the current itinerary  
You can check the route details.  
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes freeway even if [On] is selected.  
%
Touch [Profile] on the Route confirma-  
tion screen.  
The Route Profilescreen appears.  
Time restrictions  
This setting controls whether streets or  
bridges have traffic restrictions during a cer-  
tain time should be taken into account.  
p If you want to set your route to avoid  
opened bridges, select [On].  
[On]*:  
Calculate a route while avoiding streets or  
bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-  
tain time.  
Adding a waypoint  
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints  
and final destination can be sorted automati-  
cally or manually.  
[Off]:  
Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric-  
tions.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Setting a route to your destination  
06  
p When you set waypoints in the route to  
your destination, the route up to the next  
waypoint will appear in light green. The rest  
of the route will appear in light blue.  
4
Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List”  
screen.  
The route is recalculated, and Route confir-  
mation screenappears.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
1
Touch [Waypoints] on the Route con-  
firmation screen.  
The Waypoints Listscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Add].  
The Select Search methodscreen appears.  
3
Search for a location.  
After searching for a point, display it on a  
map, then touch [OK] to add to the Way-  
points Listscreen.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
07  
Checking and modifying the current route  
You can check the route details. You can also  
recalculate the route in different conditions.  
Editing waypoints  
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to  
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-  
culate the route so that is passes through  
these locations.  
To edit the waypoints, display the Waypoints  
Listscreen.  
1
Display the Top Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Destination].  
The Destination Menuscreen appears.  
3
Touch [Route Overview].  
The Route Overviewscreen appears.  
1
Display the Route Overviewscreen.  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
The Waypoints Listscreen appears.  
p [Route Overview] is active only when the  
route is set.  
Adding a waypoint  
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints  
and final destination can be sorted automati-  
cally or manually.  
Checking the current itinerary  
You can check the route details.  
1
Display the Route Overviewscreen.  
2
Touch [Profile].  
1
Display the Waypoints Listscreen.  
The Route Profilescreen appears.  
2
Touch [Add].  
The Select Search methodscreen appears.  
p When a long distance route is calculated,  
your navigation system may not be able to  
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining  
roads will be shown in the list as you drive  
on.)  
3
Search for a location.  
After searching for a point, display it on a  
map, then touch [OK] to add to the Way-  
points Listscreen.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking and modifying the current route  
07  
2
Touch [Sort].  
The Sort Waypointsscreen appears.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.  
4
Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List”  
screen.  
3
Touch the waypoint or destination.  
Put them in the desired order.  
Touch [Automatic].  
The route is recalculated, and Route confir-  
mation screenappears.  
#
You can sort the destination and waypoints auto-  
matically. The system will show the nearest way-  
point (distance in a straight line) from the current  
location as waypoint 1, and sort the other points  
(including your destination) in order of distance  
from the waypoint 1.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The map of the current position appears.  
Deleting a waypoint  
You can delete waypoints from the route and  
then recalculate the route. (You can delete  
waypoints successively.)  
#
Touch [Clear].  
The sorting waypoints is canceled.  
4
Touch [OK].  
1
Display the Waypoints Listscreen.  
The Waypoints Listscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint  
5
Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List”  
that you want to delete.  
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the  
list.  
screen.  
The route is recalculated, and Route confir-  
mation screenappears.  
3
Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List”  
6
Touch [OK].  
screen.  
The map of the current position appears.  
The route is recalculated, and Route confir-  
mation screenappears.  
Modifying the route  
calculation conditions  
4
Touch [OK].  
The map of the current position appears.  
The settings related to route calculation can  
Sorting waypoints  
be customized.  
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the  
route.  
p You cannot sort waypoints that you have al-  
ready passed.  
1
Display the Route confirmation  
screen.  
2
Touch [Options].  
The Route Optionsscreen appears.  
1
Display the Waypoints Listscreen.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Checking and modifying the current route  
#
Touch [No].  
Returns to the previous display without deleting  
the route.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Canceling the route guidance  
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-  
tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route  
guidance.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Cancel Route].  
A message confirming the cancellation of the  
current route appears.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
The current route is deleted, and a map of  
your surroundings reappears.  
#
Touch [Skip].  
The next waypoint along the route can be  
skipped.  
A new route to your destination through all re-  
maining waypoints, except for the skipped way-  
point, is calculated.  
When the route calculation is completed, Route  
confirmation screenappears.  
p [Skip] is available only when a waypoint is  
set.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
08  
!
Finding the location by specifying the  
house number  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route.  
To search for a location, display the Address  
Searchscreen.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Address].  
The Address Searchscreen appears.  
p Some information regarding traffic regula-  
tions depends on the time when the route  
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-  
mation may not correspond with a certain  
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes through the location in question.  
Also, the information on the traffic regula-  
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-  
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic  
regulations when driving.  
3
Touch the key next to Countryto se-  
To search for a location, display the Destina-  
tion Menuscreen.  
lect the country.  
If the destination is in another country, this  
changes the country setting.  
p Once the country has been selected, you  
only have to change countries when your  
destination is outside of the country you se-  
lected.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Destination].  
The Destination Menuscreen appears.  
4
Touch the key next to Stateand  
touch the desired state, province, or terri-  
tory on the list.  
If the location that you want to search for is in  
another state, province, or territory, this  
changes the area setting.  
p Once the state, province, or territory has  
been selected, you only have to change  
states, provinces, or territories when your  
destination is outside of the state, province,  
or territory you selected.  
Searching for a location by  
address  
The most frequently used function is [Ad-  
dress], in which the address is specified and  
the destination is searched.  
Searching for a city name first  
p Depending on the search results, some  
steps may be skipped.  
You can select the method of searching for a  
location by address.  
1
2
Display the Address Searchscreen.  
!
Searching for a city name first  
Touch [City].  
The Enter City Namescreen appears.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Searching for and selecting a location  
8
Touch the desired house number range.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
Finding the location by  
specifying the house number  
p Depending on the search results, some  
steps may be skipped.  
3
Enter the city name and then touch  
1
2
Display the Address Searchscreen.  
[OK].  
The Select Cityscreen appears.  
Touch [House #].  
The Enter House Numberscreen appears.  
4
Touch the desired city name.  
The Street Namescreen appears.  
3
Enter the house number and then  
#
Touch  
.
touch [OK].  
The Enter Street Namescreen appears.  
The representative location of the city appears on  
the map screen.  
5
Enter the street name and then touch  
[OK].  
The Street Selectionscreen appears.  
6
Touch the desired street.  
The Enter House Numberscreen appears.  
4
Enter the street name and then touch  
[OK].  
The Street Selectionscreen appears.  
5
Touch the desired street.  
The Enter City Namescreen appears.  
7
Enter the house number and then  
touch [OK].  
The House Number Selectionscreen ap-  
pears.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
08  
Entering three keywords  
The names including the following two words  
below are displayed as a result:  
!
The words that match with both first and  
second keywords you entered.  
!
The word beginning with the third keyword.  
e.g. Searching East West Street.  
Entered key-  
Search results  
words  
6
Enter the city name and then touch  
EAST W  
East West Streetis searchable.  
[OK].  
The Select Cityscreen appears.  
WEST S  
East West Streetis searchable.  
EAST WEST S  
East West Streetis searchable.  
7
Touch the desired city name.  
The House Number Selectionscreen ap-  
pears.  
WEST STREET  
E
East West Streetis searchable.  
#
Touch  
.
East West Streetis not search-  
able.  
W E S  
The representative location of the city appears on  
the map screen.  
E WEST  
STREET  
East West Streetis not search-  
able.  
8
Touch the desired house number range.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
Setting up a route to your  
home  
Searching for a name by  
entering multiple keywords  
If your home location is stored, the route  
home can be calculated by touching a single  
key.  
You can search for a name (such as a city  
name or a street name) by entering multiple  
keywords.  
p Up to three keywords can be entered.  
p Enter a space between keywords as you  
want to enter several ones.  
The result of search depends on the number  
of the entered keywords.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Return Home].  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
If the home location has not been stored yet,  
the confirmation message appears.  
Entering a keyword  
#
Touch [Register].  
All names containing the word beginning with  
entered keyword are displayed as a search re-  
sult.  
The Set Homescreen appears.  
= For details, refer to Registering your home  
Entering two keywords  
The names including the following two words  
below are displayed as a result:  
!
The word that matches with the first key-  
word you entered.  
!
The word beginning with the second key-  
word.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Searching for and selecting a location  
State code key  
Searching for Points of  
Interest (POI)  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parking  
lots or restaurants, is available. You can  
search for a POI by selecting the category (or  
entering the POI Name).  
To search for POIs, display the POI Search”  
screen.  
3
Touch the state code key and touch the  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
desired state, province, or territory on the  
list.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The POI Searchscreen appears.  
If the location that you want to search for is in  
another state, province, or territory, this  
changes the area setting.  
#
Touch [Country] to display the country list.  
If the destination is in another country, this  
changes the country setting.  
4
Enter the POI name and then touch  
[OK].  
The POI Listscreen appears.  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
Searching for POIs by  
specifying a category first  
You can search for POIs with one touch by  
touching the preset category.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
#
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort  
order.  
Touch [Sort].  
1
2
Display the POI Searchscreen.  
p Current order is displayed on the upper  
right of the screen.  
Touch the desired category.  
!
:
The POI Listscreen appears.  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
:
3
Touch the POI you want.  
!
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
Searching for a nearby POI  
You can search for POIs in your surroundings.  
Searching for a POI directly  
from the name of the facilities  
1
Display the POI Searchscreen.  
1
Display the POI Searchscreen.  
2
Touch [Near Me].  
2
Touch [Spell Name].  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
The POI Namescreen appears.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
08  
3
Touch the category you want.  
State code key  
The POI Listscreen appears.  
p If there are more detailed categories within  
the selected category, repeat this step as  
many times as necessary.  
4
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
Searching for POIs around the  
destination  
p This function is available when the route is  
3
Touch the state code key and touch the  
desired state, province, or territory on the  
list.  
If the location that you want to search for is in  
another state, province, or territory, this  
changes the area setting.  
set.  
1
2
Display the POI Searchscreen.  
#
Touch [Country] to display the country list.  
Touch [Near Destination].  
If the destination is in another country, this  
changes the country setting.  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
3
Touch the category you want.  
4
Enter the city name and then touch  
The POI Listscreen appears.  
[OK].  
p If there are more detailed categories within  
the selected category, repeat this step as  
many times as necessary.  
The Select Cityscreen appears.  
5
Touch the desired city name.  
The POI Listscreen appears.  
Touch  
4
Touch the POI you want.  
#
.
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
The representative location of the city appears on  
the map screen.  
6
Touch the category you want.  
Searching for POIs around the city  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
You can search for POIs around a specified  
city.  
7
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
1
Display the POI Searchscreen.  
2
Touch [Around City].  
The Enter City Namescreen appears.  
Selecting destination from  
Favorites”  
Storing locations you visit frequently saves  
time and effort.  
Selecting an item from the list provides an  
easy way to specify the position.  
p This function is not available when there is  
no registered location in Favorites.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Searching for and selecting a location  
= For details, refer to Registering a location  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
1
The Destination Menuscreen ap-  
pears.  
Selecting a location you  
searched for recently  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
The places that you have searched for in the  
past are automatically stored in History.  
p If no location is stored in Destination His-  
tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you  
perform a route calculation, you can select  
[History].)  
p Historycan store up to 100 locations. If  
the entries reach the maximum, the new  
entry overwrites the oldest one.  
3
Touch the entry you want.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
2
Touch [History].  
The Destination History Listscreen ap-  
pears.  
Searching for POIs by using  
the data on the SD memory  
card  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDSwhich  
is available separately, on your PC. (AVIC  
FEEDSwill be available on our website.) Stor-  
ing the customized POI properly and inserting  
the SD memory card enables the system to  
use the data for searches.  
3
Touch the entry you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
Searching for a location by  
coordinates  
2
3
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints  
the location.  
Touch [AVIC FEEDS].  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
1
2
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
4
Touch the category you want.  
Touch [Coordinates].  
The Select POIscreen appears.  
The Coordinate Inputscreen appears.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
08  
3
Touch [East] or [West], and then enter  
the longitude.  
To enter W 50°12.5for example, touch  
[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].  
4
Touch [North] or [South], and then  
enter the latitude.  
To enter N 5°12.5for example, touch [North],  
[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].  
5
Touch [OK].  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
09  
Registering and editing locations  
2
Touch  
to display the Quick Access  
Registering a location into  
Favorites”  
Registering a location by  
Favorites”  
menu.  
3
Touch  
.
The location is registered, and then the Edit  
Favoritescreen appears.  
Favorites can store up to 400 registered loca-  
tions. These can include your home location,  
favorite places, and destinations you have al-  
ready registered.  
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in Fa-  
4
Touch [OK].  
The registration is completed.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
Editing registered locations  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
Editing the entry in Favorites”  
3
Touch [Add].  
The Select Search methodscreen appears.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
4
Search for a location.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
5
When the map of the location you  
3
Touch next to the location that you  
want to register is displayed, touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and then the Edit  
Favoritescreen appears.  
want to edit.  
The Edit Favoritescreen appears.  
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in Fa-  
6
Touch [OK].  
The registration is completed.  
Registering a location by scroll  
mode  
4
Touch [Name].  
1
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
You can enter the desired name.  
p Up to 17 characters can be input for the  
name.  
map to the position that you want to regis-  
ter.  
#
Touch [Phone #].  
You can edit the registered phone number. To dial  
the number, touch [Call].  
#
Touch [Icon].  
The symbol displayed on the map and Favor-  
ites.  
#
Touch [Modify Location].  
You can change the registered location by scrol-  
ling the map.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and editing locations  
09  
3
Touch [Sort].  
Editing your home  
When you have already registered your home,  
you can edit the information of your home.  
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort  
order.  
p Current order is displayed on the upper  
right of the screen.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
!
:
2
Touch [Favorites].  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
p Home location is displayed on the top of  
the list.  
tance from the vehicle position.  
!
!
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-  
cently used items.  
Deleting the entry in Favorites”  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
3
Touch  
next to the home location.  
The Edit Favoritescreen appears.  
3
Touch [Delete].  
The Delete from Favoritesscreen appears.  
#
Touch [Phone #].  
You can edit the registered phone number. To dial  
the number, touch [Call].  
4
Select the location you want to delete.  
A check mark appears by the selected loca-  
tion.  
#
Touch [Modify Location].  
You can change the registered location by scrol-  
ling the map.  
4
Touch [OK].  
The registration is completed.  
Sorting the entry in Favorites”  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
#
Touch [All].  
Selects all entries.  
Touch [None].  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
#
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Registering and editing locations  
Displayed when all locations are selected. Can-  
cels all selected locations.  
After exporting the data is finished, the follow-  
ing message appears.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
Importing Favoritesedited on  
AVIC FEEDS”  
You can import the locations that you have edi-  
ted on the utility program AVIC FEEDSwhich  
is available separately to Favorites.  
p When a location that is already registered  
in Favoritesis imported, the location is  
overwritten.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
The data you selected is deleted.  
Touch [No].  
#
Cancels the deletion.  
Exporting and importing  
the entry in Favorites”  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
Exporting the entry in Favorites”  
card slot.  
Exporting the Favoritesdata to an SD mem-  
ory card for editing is possible by using the uti-  
lity program AVIC FEEDSwhich is available  
separately, on your PC.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
p If there is a previous data in the SD mem-  
ory card, the data is overwritten with new  
data when current data is exported.  
2
3
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
Touch [Favorites].  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
4
Touch  
.
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
The following message appears.  
2
3
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
Touch [Favorites].  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
4
Touch  
.
Exporting the data starts.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and editing locations  
09  
5
Touch [Yes].  
5
Touch [Delete].  
Data import starts.  
After importing the data is finished, the Fa-  
voritesscreen appears.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
The data you selected is deleted.  
Touch [No].  
Cancels the deletion.  
#
Deleting an entry in History”  
Items in History can be deleted. All entries in  
History can be deleted at once.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [History].  
The Destination History Listscreen ap-  
pears.  
3
Touch [Delete].  
The Delete from Historyscreen appears.  
4
Select the location you want to delete.  
A check mark appears by the selected loca-  
tion.  
#
Touch [All].  
Selects all entries.  
Touch [None].  
#
Displayed when all locations are selected. Can-  
cels all selected locations.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
If you have an active subscription to  
General flow chart:  
MSN Direct service, you can check and  
browse various information on your navigation  
system, such as gas prices, movie times,  
weather conditions and traffic information.  
The information will be updated periodically.  
1 Check your product key.  
You have to know your product key for the  
subscription.  
j
IMPORTANT:  
2 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct  
To receive MSNâ Direct on an MSN Direct-  
ready device, you must be within an MSN Di-  
rect coverage area; see http://www.msndirect.  
com/pioneer for current coverage maps.  
Coverage areas are affected by reception lim-  
itations of the FM network as well as other fac-  
tors, which may affect the ability to receive FM  
broadcasts. Coverage areas are subject to  
change. Not all content is available in all cover-  
age areas.  
service using your PC.  
j
3 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-  
duct.  
j
4 Activation is complete.  
© 2008 Microsoft Corporation. All rights re-  
served. Microsoft, MSN, and the MSN logo are  
trademarks of the Microsoft group of compa-  
nies.  
Checking your product key  
The product key that you can find here is used  
in the online subscription.  
Notice about MSN Direct  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of  
the MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct con-  
tent may not be current or available at times,  
and is subject to change without notice.  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The MSN Directscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Status].  
3
Write your product key down in the fol-  
lowing box;  
Activating the service  
You have to activate MSN Direct first.  
p A web-connected computer is required for  
the online subscription.  
p If you have difficulty for the online subscrip-  
tion, please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032.  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Subscribing to the MSN Direct  
10  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
service  
dates gas price information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual gas prices. Please refer to Notice about  
It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
Within two days of completing the subscription,  
1
Access the following URL and read the  
description.  
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
2
Be sure to check the coverage area and  
other availabilities of MSN Direct on the  
web page.  
!
3
Go to the page for activation and enter  
your product key.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The MSN Directscreen appears.  
4
Follow the directions on the web page  
to complete the subscription.  
Activating the MSN Direct function  
After the online subscription, complete the ac-  
tivation so that the navigation system can re-  
ceive the information.  
This operation must be performed under the  
following conditions  
You are currently in the coverage area of  
MSN Direct.  
2
Touch [Gas Prices].  
The Gas Pricesscreen appears.  
1
Boot-up your navigation system.  
2
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The MSN Directscreen appears.  
3
Touch [Status].  
4
Wait until the activation status changes  
to Active.  
It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to  
complete the activation.  
After activation is complete, the information  
will be available on each menu.  
3
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options;  
!
[Dist.] (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
[Price]:  
!
!
Browsing gas prices  
Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are  
displayed in a list.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Sorts the items in the list by price.  
Touch [Refresh].  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when new gas prices in-  
formation is received.  
Searching for a theater by  
selecting a movie title  
#
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Movie Times].  
4
Touch on the item that you want to  
The All Movie Theatersscreen appears.  
view in detail.  
#
Touch  
.
3
Touch [All Movie Titles].  
The movie titles now showing are displayed.  
Touch [Refresh].  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
#
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
5
Touch [OK].  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
4
Touch the desired movie title.  
The theaters that are currently showing the se-  
lected movie are displayed.  
Browsing movie times  
Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list.  
Switching the screen allows you to see the  
movie title now showing.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates movie information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
movie information. Please refer to Notice  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
It may take up to 6 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
5
Touch the desired tab to change the  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
sort order.  
Available options;  
!
[Dist.] (default):  
!
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
!
[Name]:  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
tion is received.  
6
Touch on the item that you want to  
5
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
Touch  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
view in detail.  
#
.
6
Touch [OK].  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
7
Touch [OK].  
#
Touch [Call].  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
#
Touch [Call].  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
Browsing weather  
information  
Local weather information can be displayed  
on a list. Switching the screen allows you to  
see worldwide weather conditions.  
Searching for a movie title by  
selecting a theater  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates weather information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual weather conditions. Please refer to Notice  
2
Touch [Movie Times].  
The All Movie Theatersscreen appears.  
3
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options;  
Checking the local weather  
information  
!
[Dist.] (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
!
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
2
Touch [Weather].  
4
Touch the desired theater.  
The local weather information is displayed.  
The movie titles currently shown on the se-  
lected theater are displayed.  
#
Touch  
.
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
The information is updated.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Using traffic information  
You can view current traffic conditions and in-  
formation. When the navigation system re-  
ceives updated traffic information, it will  
overlay the traffic information on your map  
and also display detailed text information  
when available.  
In the default setting, the navigation system  
takes into account traffic information and tries  
to avoid traffic congestions and suggest better  
routes. Also, when you are traveling along a  
route and the system finds another better  
route for avoiding the traffic congestion, the  
current route will be recalculated automati-  
cally.  
The city name, weather, temperature and wind  
direction are displayed in list format.  
3
Touch the desired area.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
The term traffic congestionin this section in-  
dicates the following types of traffic condi-  
tions:  
Stop-and-go traffic  
Stopped traffic  
Closed/blocked roads  
Touching [Forecast] displays the weather fore-  
casts for these three days.  
Viewing the traffic event  
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in  
the form of a list. This allows you to check how  
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-  
cation and their distance from your current po-  
sition.  
Checking worldwide weather  
conditions  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates traffic information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about  
2
Touch [Weather].  
The local weather information is displayed.  
3
Touch [Worldwide].  
Worldwide weather conditions are displayed.  
The area names and weather conditions are  
displayed on the list. The list is sorted alphabe-  
tically by the area name.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
4
Touch the desired area.  
2
Touch [Traffic Events].  
Detailed information is displayed.  
The Traffic Event Listscreen appears.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
been removed, the list is updated to reflect the  
new situation.  
Touch  
Touching  
#
.
allows you to check the location on  
a map. (Traffic information without positional in-  
formation cannot be checked on a map.)  
4
Touch  
.
Return to the previous screen.  
3
Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
Checking traffic information on  
the route  
All traffic information on the current route is  
displayed on screen in a list.  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
you to view the detailed information of the  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
%
Touch [Traffic On Route].  
The Traffic On Routescreen appears.  
The method for checking the content dis-  
played on the screen is the same for Viewing  
#
Touch [Sort].  
You can sort the traffic information.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
:
How to read traffic information  
on the map  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
p A line is displayed only when the map scale  
is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.  
p Icon appears only when the scale on the  
map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the  
scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-  
cording to the selected scale.  
You can sort the traffic information by dis-  
tance from your current position.  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-  
fic Events], the list will be sorted according  
to the linear distance from the vehicle posi-  
tion to the traffic information.  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-  
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-  
ing to the distance from the vehicle position  
to the traffic information.  
!
!
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-  
ing to the incident.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-  
dents, road works and others.  
Traffic event icon  
Current order is displayed on the upper right of  
the screen.  
Touch [Refresh].  
When new traffic information is received, current  
information is changed or old information has  
!
!
with yellow line:  
Stop-and-go traffic  
with red line:  
#
Stopped traffic  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
!
!
with black line:  
Closed/blocked roads  
etc.:  
1
Touch [New].  
The recommended route is displayed on the  
screen.  
#
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
Touch [Current].  
The current route is displayed on the screen.  
Setting an alternative route to  
avoid traffic congestion  
The navigation system checks whether or not  
there is the traffic information on your route at  
regular time intervals. If the navigation system  
detects any traffic jams on your current route,  
the system tries to find a better route in the  
background.  
p The following types of traffic incidents on  
the route will be checked: slow, queuing  
and stationary traffic, and closed/blocked  
roads.  
2
Touch [OK].  
The displayed route is set.  
p When no selection is made, the screen re-  
turns to previous screen.  
Checking traffic information manually  
Touching the notification icon on the map  
screen allows you to check traffic information  
on your route while icon is displayed. The noti-  
fication icon is only displayed on the naviga-  
tion map screen if there is any traffic  
information on your route.  
p The notification icon will not be available  
when your vehicle deviate from the route.  
Checking for traffic congestion  
automatically  
1
Set [Show Traffic Incident] to [View].  
= For details, refer to Show Traffic Incident  
If there is information about traffic congestion  
on your current route and if an alternative  
route can be found, the navigation system will  
recommend a new alternative route automati-  
cally. In such a case, the following screen will  
appear.  
2
Display the map screen.  
The icon appears when the system acquires  
traffic information on the current route.  
3
Touch the icon while the icon is dis-  
played.  
Traffic information on the current route is dis-  
played on the map screen.  
1
2
1 Distance from the current position of your ve-  
hicle to the point of entry into the new route.  
2 Difference in distance and travel time between  
the existing route and new route.  
p There is no action if the system cannot find  
any traffic congestion information on your  
route or the system cannot find an alterna-  
tive.  
4
Touch [Diversion] to search for an alter-  
native route.  
After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-  
culated taking all traffic congestion on your  
current route into account.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
p [Diversion] will be enable only when the  
system can find traffic congestion.  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
Touch [Sort].  
p Notification iconshows the nearest traffic  
information on the route. However, if you  
touch [Diversion], the route is recalculated  
by taking into account not only this infor-  
mation, but also all traffic congestion infor-  
mation on the route.  
#
You can sort the traffic information.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
:
For the subsequent operations, see Checking  
= For details, refer to Checking for traffic con-  
You can sort the traffic information by dis-  
tance from your current position.  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-  
fic Events], the list will be sorted according  
to the linear distance from the vehicle posi-  
tion to the traffic information.  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-  
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-  
ing to the distance from the vehicle position  
to the traffic information.  
#
Touch [List].  
The Traffic On Routescreen appears.  
Touch  
#
.
The message disappears, and the map display re-  
appears.  
!
!
:
Viewing the traffic flow  
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in  
the form of a list. This allows you to check how  
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-  
cation and their distance from your current po-  
sition.  
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-  
ing to the incident.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-  
dents, road works and others.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates traffic information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about  
Current order is displayed on the upper right of  
the screen.  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
When new traffic information is received, current  
information is changed or old information has  
been removed, the list is updated to reflect the  
new situation.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
#
Touch  
.
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
2
Touch [Traffic Flow].  
A list with traffic event information that has  
been received is shown.  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed on the list.  
3
Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
Traffic flow icon and line  
you to view the detailed information of the  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
!
!
Red: average speed in this area is slower  
than 15 mph (24 km/h)  
Yellow: average speed in this area is be-  
tween 15 mph to 45 mph (24 km/h to 72 km/  
h)  
!
Green: average speed in this area is faster  
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a  
line will be displayed)  
p Touching [All (None)] selects or deselects  
all traffic information.  
Touch [All].  
Selects all traffic information.  
Touch [None].  
Displayed when all traffic information are se-  
Selecting traffic information to  
display  
There are different types of traffic information  
that can be received via the MSN Direct ser-  
vice, and you can select which types will be in-  
corporated and displayed on your navigation  
system.  
#
#
lected. Cancels all selected traffic information.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The selected traffic information icon is added  
to the screen.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
6
Touch [OK].  
2
Touch [Traffic Settings].  
The Traffic Settingsscreen appears.  
Browsing local events  
3
Touch [Displayed Traffic Information].  
The nearby events to be held in the next few  
days are displayed on a list, and you can see  
the detail event information.  
The Traffic Type Settingsscreen appears.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates local event information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual local event conditions. Please refer to No-  
4
Touch the traffic information item to  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
display.  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
A check mark appears by the selected traffic  
information.  
2
Touch [Local Events].  
The Local Event Datescreen appears.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
8
Touch [OK].  
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
#
Touch [Call].  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
3
Touch the date on which you want to  
check the events.  
The Local Event Groups Listscreen ap-  
pears.  
4
Touch the category of events that you  
want to check.  
The Local Event Sub Groups Listscreen ap-  
pears.  
Browsing news headlines  
Recent news headlines are displayed in a list.  
5
Touch the subcategory of events that  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates news headlines, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to  
current news headlines. Please refer to Notice  
you want to check.  
The Local Eventsscreen appears.  
6
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options;  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
!
[Dist.] (default):  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
2
Touch [News].  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
7
Touch the desired event to display de-  
tailed information of the event.  
3
Touch the desired news headline.  
Further details about the news are displayed.  
#
Touch  
.
Location confirmation screenappears.  
= For details, refer to Checking the location on  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
3
Touch [Add].  
The Stock Infoscreen appears.  
4
Enter the stock symbol that you want  
to select, and then touch [OK].  
The selected stock symbol is added to the  
Stock Infoscreen.  
p Arrow in the left of each item indicates the  
stock price movement. If there is no stock  
price movements than previous close, “—”  
is displayed.  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
Viewing the detailed stock quotes  
4
Touch or to scroll the list.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
3
Touch [Stocks].  
Browsing stock quotes  
Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list.  
Touch the desired stock quote.  
Detailed stock quote information is displayed.  
Although the stock quote displayed onscreen  
is updated about 40 minutes (approx.), these  
prices are not realtime values.  
It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to  
become available under the following condi-  
tions:  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
#
Touch [Delete].  
!
The message confirming whether to delete the  
entry appears.  
And then touch [OK] to delete the stock symbol  
from the Stock Infoscreen.  
Selecting stock symbols  
Up to 30 stock symbols can be selected.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the Top Menu,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Stocks].  
The Stock Infoscreen appears.  
p The seven stock indices is always selected  
and displayed on the bottom of the list.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device  
11  
If your devices feature Bluetoothâ technology,  
this navigation system can be connected to  
your devices wirelessly. This section describes  
how to set up a Bluetooth connection.  
!
!
Searching for a specified Bluetooth device  
Pairing from your Bluetooth devices  
p If you try to register more than 5 devices,  
the system will ask you to select one of the  
registered devices to delete.  
= For details, refer to Deleting a registered  
To register your Bluetooth devices, display the  
Bluetooth Settingsscreen.  
For more information about the connectivity  
with the devices featuring Bluetooth wireless  
technology, refer to the information on our  
website.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
Preparing communication  
devices  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
This navigation system has a built-in function  
to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The Bluetooth Settingsscreen appears.  
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free  
You can register and use devices that feature  
the following profiles with this navigation sys-  
tem.  
Searching for nearby Bluetooth  
devices  
The system searches for available Bluetooth  
devices near the navigation system, displays  
them in a list, and registers them for connec-  
tion.  
!
!
HFP (Hands Free Profile)  
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-  
file)  
p When the navigation system is turned off,  
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-  
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-  
tem automatically attempts to reconnect  
the previously-connected cellular phone.  
Even when the connection is severed for  
some reason, the system automatically re-  
connects the specified cellular phone (ex-  
cept when the connection is severed due to  
cellular phone operation).  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
2
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
3
Touch [Registration].  
The Nearby Device Listscreen appears.  
Registering your Bluetooth  
devices  
You need to register your devices featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-  
nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices  
can be registered. Three registration methods  
are available:  
!
Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device  
p If the registered device features both HFP  
The system searches for devices featuring  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list if the  
device has found.  
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is  
made and then the Bluetooth Audio con-  
nection is made.  
p Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order  
that the devices are found.  
Searching for a specified  
Bluetooth device  
If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device  
using [Search devices] and [Register from  
mobile phone], try this method if your Blue-  
tooth device is found in the list.  
4
Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-  
pears in the list.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that  
you want to connect, check that the device  
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology connection.  
2
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
3
Touch [Registration].  
5
Touch the Bluetooth device name you  
The Nearby Device Listscreen appears.  
want to register.  
The message Please follow the instructions  
on your mobile phone.appears.  
4
Touch [Select specific devices].  
The Select specific devicesscreen appears.  
6
Enter the PIN code (the default PIN  
5
Touch the model name of the Bluetooth  
code is 1111) using the Bluetooth device.  
The device is registered in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
After the device is successfully registered, the  
Bluetooth connection is established from the  
navigation system.  
device to be connected.  
The system searches for devices featuring  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list if the  
device has found.  
p If the registered device features HFP, the  
hands-free connection is made.  
p If the registered device features A2DP, Blue-  
tooth Audio connection is made.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device  
11  
and requesting connection from the Bluetooth  
device.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
p If you cannot find the desired model name  
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search  
the devices available nearby.  
2
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
3
Touch [Registration].  
6
Touch the Bluetooth device name you  
The Nearby Device Listscreen appears.  
want to register.  
The message Please follow the instructions  
on your mobile phone.appears.  
4
Touch [Register from mobile phone].  
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth  
wireless technology connection.  
7
Enter the PIN code (the default PIN  
code is 1111) using the Bluetooth device.  
The device is registered in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
After the device is successfully registered, the  
Bluetooth connection is established from the  
navigation system.  
5
Register the navigation system on your  
Bluetooth device.  
If your device asks you to enter a password,  
enter the PIN code (password) of the naviga-  
tion system.  
When the device is successfully registered,  
the connection settings are made from the de-  
vice.  
p If the registered device features HFP, the  
hands-free connection is made.  
p If the registered device features A2DP, Blue-  
tooth Audio connection is made.  
p If the registered device features both HFP  
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is  
made and then the Bluetooth Audio con-  
nection is made.  
p If registration fails repeat the procedure  
from the beginning.  
Pairing from your Bluetooth  
devices  
You can register the Bluetooth device by set-  
ting the navigation system to standby mode  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device  
connection. However, connect the Bluetooth  
device manually in the following cases:  
Deleting a registered device  
When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth  
devices and you want to add another one, you  
must first delete one of the registered devices.  
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the  
phone book entries and call history lists  
that correspond to the phone will be also  
cleared.  
!
Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-  
tered, and you want to manually select the  
device to be used.  
!
!
You want to reconnect a disconnected  
Bluetooth device.  
Connection cannot be established automa-  
tically for some reason.  
If you start connection manually, carry out the  
following procedure. You can also connect the  
Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-  
tem detect it automatically.  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
2
Touch [Registration].  
The following message appears.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
2
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
3
Touch [OK].  
3
Touch [Connection].  
The Delete from Connection Listscreen  
The Connection Listscreen appears.  
appears.  
4
Touch the name of the device that you  
4
Touch the Bluetooth device name that  
want to connect.  
you want to delete.  
The Select Profilescreen appears.  
The registration is canceled.  
Connecting a registered  
Bluetooth device  
The navigation system automatically connects  
the Bluetooth device selected as the target of  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting the Bluetooth device  
11  
5
Touch the profile that you want to con-  
nect.  
You can select the following profiles:  
!
!
!
[Handsfree and Audio]:  
Connects the device as the hands-free  
phone and the Bluetooth audio player.  
[Audio]:  
Connects the device as Bluetooth audio  
player.  
[Handsfree]:  
Connects the device as the hands-free  
phone.  
Connection starts.  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the map screen by  
touching [OK].  
p To cancel the connection to your device,  
touch [Cancel].  
p The selected device is set for priority con-  
necting.  
p If connection fails, check whether your de-  
vice is waiting for a connection and then re-  
try.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
2
3
: Network name of the cellular phone  
company  
: Strength of the Bluetooth connection  
between the navigation system and the de-  
vice  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as  
much as possible while driving.  
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®  
technology, this navigation system can be con-  
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using  
this hands-free function, you can operate the  
navigation system to make or receive phone  
calls. You can also transfer the phone book  
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-  
gation system. This section describes how to  
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-  
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
technology on the navigation system.  
4
5
: Reception status of the cellular phone  
: Battery status of the cellular phone  
Making a phone call  
You can make a phone call in many different  
ways.  
Direct dialing  
1
Display the Phone Menuscreen.  
For more information about the connectivity  
with the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology, refer to the information  
on our website.  
2
Touch [Dial Pad].  
The direct dial screen appears.  
Displaying the Phone Menu  
Use the Phone Menuif you connect the cel-  
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-  
tion.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
Chapter 11.  
3
Touch the number keys to enter the  
phone number.  
The phone number that was input is dis-  
played.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
And then [OK] is activated.  
2
Touch [Phone].  
#
Touch  
.
The Phone Menuscreen appears.  
The input number is deleted a digit at a time from  
the end of the number. Continuing to press this  
deletes all of the digits.  
2
34 5  
#
Touch  
.
1
Return to the previous screen.  
4
5
Touch [OK] to make a call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
Touch to end the call.  
1
: Name of connected cellular phone  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Making a call home easily  
You can call home without taking the time to  
enter the phone number if the phone number  
has been registered.  
12  
Alphabet tabs  
Makes the screen jump to the beginning of  
the page including the entry whose names  
start with any of selected alphabets.  
Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-  
cluding the entry whose names start with pri-  
mary symbols or numbers.  
Touching [Others] displays the page including  
entries that are not assigned to any of the  
other tabs.  
1
Display the Phone Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Call Home].  
Dialing home starts.  
p If you have not registered your home num-  
ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]  
to start registration.  
4
Touch the desired entry on the list to  
make a call.  
p If the entry has multiple phone number  
= For details, refer to Registering your  
data, the selection list appears.  
#
Touch [Search].  
Calling a number in the  
Contacts List”  
The Contacts Name Searchscreen appears.  
You can search by the names registered in the  
Contacts Listscreen.  
After finding the entry you want to call in the  
Contacts Listscreen, you can select the  
number and make the call.  
p Before using this function, you need to set  
the phone number from the phone book to  
Contacts.  
#
Touch [Delete].  
The Delete from Contactsscreen appears.  
If you select the entry you want to delete and  
touch [Delete], a message appears.  
If you touch [OK], the entry is deleted.  
= For details, refer to Transferring the phone  
5
Touch  
to end the call.  
1
Display the Phone Menuscreen.  
Making a phone call using the  
received call history  
The received call history saves 30 calls per re-  
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
2
Touch [Contacts].  
The Contacts Listscreen appears.  
1
Display the Phone Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Received Calls].  
The Received Calls Listscreen appears.  
3
Switch the page of the list to display  
the desired entry.  
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to  
the first page of the contacts whose names  
start with that letter.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
3
Touch an entry on the list.  
Dialing starts.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
#
Touch [Detail].  
The Detailed Informationscreen appears.  
You can check the details of the party before mak-  
ing a phone call.  
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
Making a phone call using  
missed call history  
The missed call history saves 30 calls per re-  
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
You can check the details of the party before mak-  
ing a phone call.  
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
1
Display the Phone Menuscreen.  
Making a phone call using the  
dialed number history  
2
Touch [Missed Calls].  
The dialed number history saves 30 calls per  
registered cellular phone. If the entries exceed  
30, the oldest one will be deleted.  
The Missed Calls Listscreen appears.  
1
Display the Phone Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Dialed Calls].  
The Dialed Calls Listscreen appears.  
3
Touch an entry on the list.  
Dialing starts.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
#
Touch [Detail].  
The Detailed Informationscreen appears.  
3
Touch an entry on the list.  
Dialing starts.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
#
Touch [Detail].  
The Detailed Informationscreen appears.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
4
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
5
Touch  
to end the call.  
Dialing a facilitys phone number  
You can make a call to facilities with phone  
number data.  
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
You can check the details of the party before mak-  
ing a phone call.  
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
Dialing GOOG-411  
2
Touch [POI].  
The POI Searchscreen appears.  
CAUTION  
Local and/or long distance charges for making a  
phone call may apply.  
3
Search for the POI.  
The POI Listscreen appears.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
You can dial GOOG-411 to dial the free busi-  
ness listing service of Googleä with one  
touch.  
4
Touch  
next to the POI that you want  
1
Touch [GOOG-411] on the Phone  
Menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
to call.  
The Detailed POI Informationscreen ap-  
pears.  
Dialing GOOG-411 starts.  
5
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
2
You can now use the GOOG-411 phone  
.
service.  
For details about GOOG-411 service and avail-  
ability, contact Googleä.  
6
Touch  
to end the call.  
Dialing from the map  
You can make a call by selecting the icon of a  
registered location or a POI icon from the map  
screen.  
Dialing the entry in the Favorites”  
You can make a call to the entry registered in  
the Favorites.  
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
1
Display the Destination Menuscreen.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
1
Scroll the map, and place the cursor on  
The Favoritesscreen appears.  
an icon on the map.  
3
Touch next to the location that you  
2
Touch  
.
want to make a call.  
The Edit Favoritescreen appears.  
The Detailed POI Informationscreen ap-  
pears.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
3
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
Receiving a phone call  
You can perform hands-free answering by  
using the navigation system.  
#
Touch [Vol ] or [Vol +].  
You can adjust volume when you are talking.  
#
#
and  
Touch  
If you touch [Close Menu], the menu is closed  
appears.  
to reject an incoming call.  
Answering an incoming call  
The system informs you that it is receiving a  
call by displaying a message and producing a  
ring sound once.  
If [Auto Answer Preference] is set to [Off],  
answer the call manually. Answering is avail-  
able if any screen is displayed, such as the  
map screen or the setting screen.  
p You can set this navigation system to auto-  
matically answer incoming calls.  
= For details, refer to Answering a call  
To display the menu again, touch  
.
3
Touch  
to end the call.  
1
When a call comes in, the answering  
The call ends.  
operation menu appears on the screen.  
p If the voice on the other end of the call is  
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume  
of the received voice.  
= For more details about Volume, refer  
p You may hear a noise when you hang up  
the phone.  
p The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in Contacts.  
p Depending on the caller ID service, the  
phone number of the received call may not  
be displayed. Unknownappears instead.  
Rejecting an incoming call  
You can reject an incoming call.  
= For details, refer to Setting the automatic re-  
%
When a call comes in, touch  
.
The call is rejected.  
p The rejected call is recorded in the missed  
call history list.  
= For details, refer to Making a phone call  
2
To answer an incoming call, touch  
.
The operation menu during a call appears.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Transferring the phone book  
You can transfer the numbers in a registered  
user phones address book into the Contacts.  
p Depending on the cellular phone, Phone  
Bookmay be called a name such as Con-  
tacts, Business cardor something else.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer the entire phone book  
at once. In this case, transfer addresses  
one at a time from your phone book using  
your cellular phone.  
12  
3
Check that the following screen is dis-  
played, and operate your cellular phone to  
transfer the phone book entries.  
p The maximum 1 000 entries can be trans-  
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-  
ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be  
transferred. If more than one number is re-  
gistered for one person, such as work place  
and home, each number is counted sepa-  
rately.  
After transferring the data is finished, a mes-  
sage asking whether you want to transfer  
more data appears.  
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-  
bers.  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-  
tem may not be able to display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled.)  
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be correctly transferred.  
4
Touch [No].  
The transferred data is imported to the naviga-  
tion system.  
When the data is successfully imported, an  
import complete message is displayed and the  
Contacts Listscreen appears.  
p The transferred data can not be edited on  
the navigation system.  
p It may take time depending on how many  
entries will be transferred.  
1
Connect the cellular phone that has the  
#
Touch [Yes].  
phone book to transfer.  
Repeat the steps to transfer more data.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered  
Setting the Bluetooth  
2
Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the  
Settings”  
Phone Menuscreen.  
To set the Bluetooth Settings, display the  
Bluetooth Settingsscreen.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission  
The Bluetooth Settingsscreen appears.  
You can stop transmission of electric waves by  
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do  
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we  
recommend selecting [Off].  
Editing the device name  
You can change the device name to be dis-  
played on your cellular phone. (Default is  
[PIONEER NAVI].)  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth On/Off].  
Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switching be-  
tween [On] and [Off].  
2
Touch [Device Name].  
The keyboard to enter the name appears.  
3
Touch  
to delete the current name,  
Echo canceling and noise reduction  
and enter the new name by using the key-  
board.  
When you are operating hands-free phoning  
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable  
echo. This function reduces the echo and  
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,  
and maintains a certain sound quality.  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
2
Touch [Echo Cancel].  
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
4
Touch [OK].  
The name is changed.  
p Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de-  
Answering a call automatically  
vice name.  
The navigation system automatically answers  
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you  
can answer a call while driving without taking  
your hands off the steering wheel.  
Editing the password  
You can change the password to be used for  
authentication on your cellular phone. (De-  
fault is [1111].)  
p Four to eight characters can be entered for  
a password.  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
2
Touch [Auto Answer Preference].  
The Auto Answer Preferencescreen ap-  
pears.  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
2
Touch [Password].  
The Set Passwordscreen appears.  
3
Touch any key to enter the password  
you want to set and then touch [OK].  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
2
Touch [Clear Memory].  
The Clear Memoryscreen appears.  
3
Touch the desired option.  
!
[Off]: No automatic response. Respond  
manually  
!
!
[Immediately]: Answers immediately  
[After 3 seconds]: Answers after three sec-  
onds  
[After 6 seconds]: Answers after six sec-  
onds  
[After 10 seconds]: Answers after ten sec-  
onds  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
!
!
!
!
!
!
Contacts:  
You can clear the registered phone book.  
Received Calls List:  
You can clear the received call history list.  
Dialed Calls List:  
You can clear the dialed call history list.  
Missed Calls List:  
Setting the automatic rejection  
function  
If this function is on, the navigation system  
automatically rejects all incoming calls.  
You can clear the missed call history list.  
#
Touch [Clear All].  
It clears all the data that correspond to the con-  
nected cellular phone.  
1
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
2
Touch [Refuse All Calls].  
Data on the selected item is cleared from this  
navigation systems memory.  
p If you do not want to clear memory that you  
Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p If both Refuse All Callsand Auto An-  
swer Preferenceare activated, Refuse  
All Callstakes priority and all incoming  
calls are automatically rejected.  
p If Refuse All Callsis set to [On], rejected  
incoming calls will not be stored in the  
missed call list.  
have selected, touch [No].  
Updating the Bluetooth  
wireless technology software  
Update files will be available for download in  
the future. You will be able to download the lat-  
est update from an appropriate website to  
your PC.  
p Before you download the files and install  
the update, read through the instructions  
on the website. Follow the instructions on  
the website for steps until [Firmware up-  
date] becomes active.  
Clearing memory  
You can clear the memory of each item that  
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:  
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-  
tory list and preset dials.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
instruction manual that came with your cel-  
lular phone for detailed instructions.  
With cellular phones, phone book transfer  
may not work even though your phone is  
paired with the navigation system. In that  
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-  
ing again from your phone to the naviga-  
tion system, and then perform the phone  
book transfer.  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
!
2
Display the Bluetooth Settings”  
screen.  
3
Touch [Firmware update].  
The current version is displayed.  
Making and receiving calls  
!
You may hear a noise in the following situa-  
tions:  
When you answer the phone by using  
the button on the phone.  
When the person on the other end of  
line hangs up the phone.  
!
!
!
If the person on the other end of the phone  
call cannot hear the conversation due to an  
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-  
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.  
With some cellular phones, even if you  
press the accept button on the cellular  
phone when a call comes in, hands-free  
phoning may not be performed.  
The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in the phone book. When one phone  
number is registered under different  
names, the name that comes first alphabe-  
tically is displayed.  
4
Touch [Firmware update].  
Update starts.  
Notes for hands-free phoning  
General notes  
!
Connection to all cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-  
anteed.  
!
The line-of-sight distance between this na-  
vigation system and your cellular phone  
must be 10 meters or less when sending  
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth  
technology. However, the actual transmis-  
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-  
mated distance, depending on the usage  
environment.  
With some cellular phones, the speakers of  
the system may not produce a ring sound.  
If private mode is selected on the cellular  
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-  
abled.  
!
If the phone number of the received call is  
not registered in the phone book, the  
phone number of the received call appears.  
The received call history and the dialed  
number history  
!
Calls made or editing performed only on  
your cellular phone will not be reflected to  
the dialed number history or phone book in  
the navigation system.  
You cannot make a call to the entry of an  
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-  
ceived call history.  
If calls are made by operating your cellular  
phone, no history data will be recorded in  
the navigation system.  
!
!
!
!
Registration and connection  
!
Cellular phone operations vary depending  
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
12  
Phone book transfers  
!
If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-  
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may  
not be able to be downloaded completely.  
With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer all items in the phone  
book at one time. In this case, transfer  
items one by one from your cellular phone.  
Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-  
gation system may not display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled, or first name and last name may  
be in reverse order.)  
!
!
!
!
If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-  
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
13  
Customizing preferences  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS  
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from  
how many satellites the signal is received.  
The options in the Navi  
Settingsmenu  
Displaying the Navi Settings”  
screen  
Signal com-  
munication  
Used in posi-  
tioning  
Color  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Orange  
Yellow  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
p When the GPS antenna is connected to  
this navigation system, [OK] is dis-  
played.  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
3
Touch [Navi Settings].  
When the GPS antenna is not con-  
nected to this navigation system, [NOK]  
is displayed.  
The Navi Settingsmenu appears.  
p If reception is poor, please change the  
installation position of the GPS antenna.  
3 Parking Brake  
When the parking brake is applied, [On] is  
displayed. When the parking brake is re-  
leased, [Off] is displayed.  
4 Power Voltage  
The power voltage (reference value) pro-  
vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga-  
tion system is shown. If the voltage goes  
out of the range from 11 V to 15 V, check  
that power cable connection is correct.  
5 Illumination  
Checking the connections of leads  
Check that leads are properly connected be-  
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.  
Please also check whether they are connected  
in the correct positions.  
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-  
hicle are on, [On] is displayed. When the  
small lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is dis-  
played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-  
nected, [Off] appears.)  
1
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Connection Status].  
The GPS Statusscreen appears.  
6 Back Signal  
When the gear lever is shifted to R, the  
signal switches to [High] or [Low]. (One of  
these is displayed depending on the vehi-  
cle.)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Checking sensor learning  
status and driving status  
p The navigation system can automatically  
use its sensor memory based on the outer  
dimensions of the tires.  
1 Speed Pulse  
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-  
gation system is shown. [0] is shown while  
the vehicle is stationary.  
1
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
2 GPS ANT  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
13  
2
Touch [3D Calibration Status].  
Clearing status  
The 3D Calibration Statusscreen appears.  
You can delete the learned results stored in  
[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-  
tus].  
6
7
1
2
1
Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].  
The following message appears.  
3
4
5
1 Speed  
The speed detected by the navigation sys-  
tem is indicated. (This indication may be  
different from the actual speed of your vehi-  
cle, so please do not use this instead of the  
speedometer.)  
2
Touch [Yes].  
2 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational  
speed  
Clears the learned results stored in [Distance]  
or [Speed Pulse].  
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your  
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed  
when your vehicle turns to left or right is  
shown.  
3
Touch [Learning Status].  
The following message appears.  
3 Distance  
Driving distance is indicated.  
4 Speed Pulse  
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.  
5 Learning Status  
Current driving mode is indicated.  
6 Inclination  
Degree of slope of the street that you are  
currently running is indicated.  
7 Degree of learning  
4
Touch [All].  
Clears all learning statuses.  
p Touch [All] for the following cases:  
After changing the installation position  
of the navigation system  
Sensor learning situations for distance  
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn  
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-  
cated by the length of bars.  
p When tires have been changed or  
chains fitted, turning on the Speed  
Pulse allows the system to detect the  
fact that the tire diameter has changed,  
and automatically replaces the value for  
calculating distance.  
After changing the installation angle of  
the navigation system  
After moving the navigation system to  
another vehicle  
#
Touch [Distance].  
Clears the learned results stored in [Distance].  
p When the distance accuracy is low, touch  
[Distance].  
p If ND-PG1 is connected, the distance  
calculation value cannot be replaced  
automatically.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Customizing preferences  
!
!
[Gas Unit]:  
Set the fuel unit.  
[Currency]:  
Using the Gas Mileagefunction  
Inputting the fuel consumption  
information for calculating the fuel cost  
Set the unit of currency.  
You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-  
tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-  
tion in the navigation system.  
When all the items are entered, inputting the  
fuel consumption information is complete.  
Entering the fueling information  
1
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
When you enter the fueling information to the  
navigation system, and export the data to SD  
memory cards, you can check the fuel con-  
sumption information by using the utility pro-  
gram AVIC FEEDSwhich is available  
separately, on your PC.  
2
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The Gas Mileage Settingscreen appears.  
p Up to 24 sets of Gas Price Calculationen-  
tries can be stored. You can also export the  
data, as described below.  
If the entries reach the maximum number,  
a new entry will overwrite the oldest one.  
3
tion.  
Enter the fuel consumption informa-  
Gas Mileage Management function only as-  
sists you to calculate your average mileage  
based on the information you input. The func-  
tion does not receive data directly from the ve-  
hicle.  
Enter the following items:  
!
[Surface Road Gas Mileage]:  
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin-  
ary roads.  
p How the fuel cost is entered depends on  
the [Gas Unit] setting.  
1
2
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
When [Gas Unit] is set to [Gallon].  
Enter how many miles (kilometers)  
you get to a gallon.  
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The Gas Mileage Settingscreen appears.  
When [Gas Unit] is set to [Liter].  
Enter how much fuel you need to tra-  
vel 60 miles (100 kilometers).  
[Freeway Gas Mileage]:  
!
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the  
freeway.  
p How the fuel cost is entered depends on  
the [Gas Unit] setting.  
When [Gas Unit] is set to [Gallon].  
Enter how many miles (kilometers)  
you get to a gallon.  
3
Touch [Gas Price Calculation].  
The Gas Price Calculationscreen appears.  
When [Gas Unit] is set to [Liter].  
Enter how much fuel you need to tra-  
vel 60 miles (100 kilometers).  
[Gas Price Per Unit]:  
!
Enter the fuel unit price.  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
13  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
2
3
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The Gas Mileage Settingscreen appears.  
4
Enter the following settings:  
!
[Distance]:  
Enter the distance traveled since the pre-  
vious fueling.  
p The distance is entered automatically  
only when the distance traveled since  
the previous fueling is recorded.  
[Gas Pumped]:  
Enter the amount of fuel pumped.  
[Gas Price Per Unit]:  
!
!
4
Touch [Export].  
Enter the fuel unit price.  
After a message confirming whether to export  
the data appeared, exporting the data to the  
SD memory card starts.  
When all the items are entered, the fuel con-  
sumption is displayed next to Gas Mileage.  
The Gas Mileage Settingscreen appears  
when it is done.  
Recording your travel history  
Activating the track logger enables you to re-  
cord your driving history (called track log”  
below). You can review the travel history later.  
p If an SD memory card is inserted into the  
SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in  
the SD memory card.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The Gas Mileage Settingscreen appears.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
Exporting the data of Gas Mileage  
Management”  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
Exporting the Gas Mileage Management”  
data to an SD memory card is possible.  
p The data stored in this navigation system  
will be cleared as exporting it to the SD  
memory card.  
p If there is a previous data in the SD mem-  
ory card, the data is overwritten with new  
data when current data is exported.  
2
3
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
Touch [Drive Log Settings].  
The Drive Log Settingsscreen appears.  
4
Touch [Drive Log Settings].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Customizing preferences  
!
!
[On]:  
2
Touch [Set Home].  
You can export your track log to the SD  
card.  
[Off] (default):  
The Set Homescreen appears.  
You cannot export your track log to the SD  
card.  
#
Touch [Type].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
!
[Private] (default):  
Set the track log attribute to Private.  
[Business]:  
Set the track log attribute to Business.  
[Other]:  
Set the track log attribute to Other.  
3
Touch [Home].  
The Select Search methodscreen appears.  
Touch [Phone #].  
#
When you have already registered your home,  
you can edit your home number.  
p While the setting is [On], the navigation  
system continues to store the track logs in  
the inserted SD memory card.  
4
Search for a location.  
After searching for a point, display it on a  
map, then touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and then the Set  
Homescreen appears.  
Using the demonstration guidance  
This is a demonstration function for retail  
stores. After a route is set, touching this key  
starts the simulation of route guidance.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 8.  
5
Touch [OK].  
1
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
The registration is completed.  
2
Touch [Demo Mode].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Correcting the current location  
Touch the screen to adjust the current position  
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the  
map.  
!
[On]:  
Repeat demo drive.  
[Off] (default):  
Demo Mode is set off.  
!
1
2
3
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
Touch [Modify Current Location].  
Scroll to the position where you want  
3
Display the map screen.  
The demonstration guidance will begin.  
to set, then touch [OK].  
Registering your home  
Registering your home position saves time  
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can  
be calculated easily with a single touch of the  
key from the Destination Menu. The regis-  
tered home position can also be modified  
later.  
Options on the System  
Settingsmenu  
Displaying the System  
Settingsscreen  
1
Display the Navi Settingsscreen.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
13  
2
Touch [Settings].  
5
Touch the desired language.  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
After the language is selected, the screen re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
3
Touch [System Settings].  
The System Settingsscreen appears.  
6
Touch [OK] on the Regional Settings”  
screen.  
A message confirming whether to restart the  
navigation system appears.  
7
Touch [OK].  
The navigation system restarts.  
Press the MODE button or the HOME button.  
#
Cancels the setting of the languages.  
Setting the time difference  
Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-  
ence (+, ) from the time originally set in your  
navigation system.  
Customizing the regional settings  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
1
Display the Regional Settingsscreen.  
The Regional Settingsscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Time].  
The Time Settingsscreen appears.  
Selecting the language  
3
[].  
To set the time difference, touch [+] or  
You can set the languages used on the pro-  
gram and voice guidance. Each language can  
be set separately.  
The time difference between the time origin-  
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-  
dard Time) and the current location of your  
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time  
difference. Touching [+] or [] changes the  
time difference display in one-hour incre-  
ments.  
1
Display the Regional Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Program Language].  
The language list is displayed.  
3
Touch the desired language.  
After the language is selected, the screen re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
The time difference can be set from 4 to +9  
hours.  
4
Touch [Voice Language].  
4
Touch [Summer Time].  
The Voice Language Selectionscreen ap-  
If necessary, set to summer time.  
pears.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Customizing preferences  
Summer time is off by default. Touch [Sum-  
mer Time] to change the time if you are in the  
summer time period. This turns the display  
below summer time [On].  
5
Touch [Time format].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[12H] (default):  
Switching the display for 12 hours with am/  
pm.  
[24H]:  
3
4
Touch [+] or [] to set the speed.  
p The estimated time of arrival is not necessa-  
rily estimated based on this speed value.  
!
Switching the display for 24 hours.  
Touch [OK].  
The settings are completed.  
Changing the unit between km and miles  
This setting controls the unit of distance and  
speed displayed on your navigation system.  
Setting the Volume for  
Guidance and Phone  
1
Display the Regional Settingsscreen.  
The sound volume for the navigation can be  
set. You can separately set the volume of the  
route guidance and the beep sound.  
2
Touch [km / mile].  
A message confirming whether to change the  
setting appears.  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
It changes the settings as follows:  
2
Touch [Volume].  
!
!
!
[mile] (default):  
Show distance in miles.  
[Mile&Yard]:  
Show distance in miles and yards.  
[km]:  
The Volume Settingsscreen appears.  
Show distance in kilometers.  
#
Touch [No].  
Cancels the setting.  
Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle  
3
Touch the key next to Beep.  
When calculating the expected time of arrival  
and the number of hours to the destination,  
set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-  
ary roads using [+] and [].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
[On] (default):  
A beep sounds.  
[Off]:  
1
Display the Regional Settingsscreen.  
!
Muting the beep sound.  
2
Touch [Speed].  
The Average Speed Settingsscreen ap-  
pears.  
4
Touch [+] or [] to set their volume.  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
items.  
!
[Guidance]  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
13  
This setting controls the guidance volume  
of navigation.  
p Splash screen images should be used with-  
in the following formats;  
p When set to , guidance is output.  
When set to , no guidance is output.  
[Phone Ringtone]  
This setting controls the incoming ring tone  
volume.  
BMP or JPEG files  
Allowable horizontal and vertical size  
are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller  
Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller  
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is  
not guaranteed.  
!
!
[Phone Voice]  
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-  
lume.  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the built-in memory, but the ability to save  
these images cannot be guaranteed com-  
pletely. If your original image data is de-  
leted, insert the SD memory card again  
and re-import the original image.  
p Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust-  
ments are related to the cellular phone fea-  
turing Bluetooth technology. No  
adjustment is needed when the cellular  
phone featuring Bluetooth technology is  
not connected.  
1
Create a folder named Pictureson the  
top-most directory of the SD memory card  
and store the picture files in this folder.  
p Volume of the AV source is adjusted by  
VOL (+/) button.  
= For details, refer to Checking part names  
2
Store the picture files in Pictures.  
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
5
To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
Changing the splash screen  
You can change the splash screen to the other  
images stored in the navigation system.  
4
5
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
Touch [Splash Screen].  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
The Select Splash Screenscreen appears.  
2
Touch [Splash Screen].  
6
Touch [Select from SD].  
The Select Splash Screenscreen appears.  
The Select Splash Screenscreen appears.  
3
Touch the image to use as the splash  
7
Touch the image to use as the splash  
screen from the list.  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
4
Touch [OK].  
8
Touch [OK].  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
system returns to the System Settings”  
menu.  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
system returns to the System Settings”  
menu.  
Changing to the splash screen  
stored in the SD memory card  
You can change the splash screen that ap-  
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy  
your chosen image to the SD memory card,  
and select the image to import.  
Setting for rear view camera  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-  
tails, consult your dealer.)  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Customizing preferences  
Rear view camera  
Adjusting the response  
positions of the touch panel  
(touch panel calibration)  
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the  
screen deviate from the actual positions that  
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-  
sitions of the touch panel screen.  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen rear  
view camera image installed on your vehicle.  
When the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) po-  
sition, the screen automatically switches to  
full-screen rear view camera.  
Camera for Rear view mode  
p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a  
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which  
could damage the screen.  
[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.  
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a  
split screen where map information is partially  
displayed. Please be aware that with this set-  
ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and  
that a portion of what is seen by the camera is  
not viewable.  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Screen Calibration].  
A message confirming whether to start the ca-  
libration appears.  
3
Gently touch the center of + mark dis-  
CAUTION  
played on the screen.  
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which  
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the  
screen image may appear reversed.  
The target indicates the order.  
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-  
tion data is saved.  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
p Immediately verify whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)  
from another position.  
p When the screen changes to full-screen  
rear view camera image during normal  
driving, switch to the opposite setting in  
[Polarity].  
adjusted position data.  
#
Press the MODE button.  
Returns to the previous adjustment position.  
Press and hold the MODE button.  
#
Cancels the adjustment.  
Setting the illumination color  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
The illumination color can be selected from 11  
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination  
color can switched between these 11 colors in  
order.  
2
Touch [Back Camera].  
The Back Camera Settingsscreen appears.  
To set the illumination color, display the Illu-  
mination Colorscreen.  
3
Touch [Camera] to turn it [On].  
p You can only switch to Rear Viewif this  
setting is [On].  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
4
Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to  
2
Touch [Illumi Color].  
Polarityto select the appropriate polarity  
setting.  
The Illumination Colorscreen appears.  
!
Battery When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
!
GND When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in  
the REVERSE (R) position  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
13  
3
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the values for  
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite  
color.  
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while  
adjusting the color.  
Each time you touch [+] or [] increases or de-  
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to  
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or  
decreased.  
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-  
Selecting the color from the preset  
colors  
lues set to +00.  
4
Touch [Memory 1], [Memory 2] or  
[Memory 3] to store the illumination color.  
1
Display the Illumination Colorscreen.  
2
Touch the color you want.  
5
Touch [OK] to return to the previous  
Available options;  
screen.  
!
Colored keys Selects the desired preset  
color  
!
Memory 1/Memory 2/Memory 3 Col-  
ors registered in the memory  
= For details, refer to Creating a user-de-  
Checking the version information  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
2
Touch [Service Information].  
The Service Information Screenscreen ap-  
pears.  
!
Scan Shifts between the eight default  
colors in sequence gradually.  
3
Check the version information.  
Creating a user-defined color and  
storing it to memory  
You can create a user-defined color and set it  
as the illumination color.  
Replicating the settings  
You can import settings you have made on the  
utility program AVIC FEEDSwhich is avail-  
able separately to the navigation system.  
1
Display the Illumination Colorscreen.  
2
Touch [Custom].  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
The Illumination Colorscreen appears.  
card slot.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to In-  
2
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
3
Touch [Settings].  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
4
Touch [Setting Replicator].  
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-  
A message confirming whether to update the  
settings appears.  
lected.  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Customizing preferences  
5
Touch [Yes].  
Update starts.  
After updating the settings is finished, a mes-  
sage confirming whether to restart the naviga-  
tion system appears.  
6
Touch [OK].  
The navigation system restarts.  
Turning off the screen  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without  
turning off the voice guidance.  
%
Touch [Screen Off] on the Settings  
Menumenu.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
The screen is turned off.  
p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it  
back on.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
14  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (FM).  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
%
Touch [FM] on the AV Sourcemenu to  
display the FMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
3
4
Reading the screen  
1
2 3 4  
56  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Select a preset channel  
7
8
[c] or [d] can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
3 Perform manual tuning  
9
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The  
frequencies move up or down one step at a  
time.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1  
to FM3.  
3 Signal level indicator  
4 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
5 Frequency indicator  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
6 Current time  
7 Program service name indicator  
Shows the program service name (station  
name) of the current station.  
8 LOCAL indicator  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
9 STEREO indicator  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
4 Select an FM band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM  
band is displayed, FM1, FM2 or FM3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
Shows that the frequency selected is being  
broadcast in stereo.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
Using the radio (FM)  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [FM] on the AV Sourcemenu to  
display the FMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch  
.
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1
2
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, touch and hold a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P. C 1) is appears.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
Touch [BSM].  
p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three  
FM bands, as well as 6 AM stations can be  
stored in memory.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
14  
2
Touch [Start] to start BSM.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [Local].  
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
3
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.  
Level: 1 2 3 4  
p The level 4setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
15  
Using the radio (AM)  
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (AM).  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Select a preset channel  
c or d can be used to switch presets.  
3 Perform manual tuning  
%
Touch [AM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the AMscreen.  
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The  
frequencies move up or down one step at a  
time.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
Reading the screen  
1
2 3 4  
56  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 LOCAL indicator  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
3 Signal level indicator  
4 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
5 Frequency indicator  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
6 Current time  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
3
1 Display the Functionmenu  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
15  
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to this page.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, touch and hold a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P. C 1) is appears.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
Using the Functionmenu  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
1
Touch [AM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
to display the AMscreen.  
sitivity.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.  
Level: 1 2  
2
Touch  
.
p The level 2setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
1
2
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
16  
HD RadioäReception  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for HD Radio reception.  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
p For details concerning operation, refer to  
the HD Radio tuners operation manual.  
%
Touch [Digital Radio] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to display the Digital  
Radioscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
3
4
Reading the screen  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Select a preset channel  
1
2
3
4
56  
[c] or [d] can be used to switch presets chan-  
nels.  
3 Perform manual tuning  
7
8
9
a
b
To tune manually, touch [c] or [d] briefly. The  
frequencies move up or down one step at a  
time.  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,  
FM2, FM3 or AM.  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 Multicasting indicator  
Shows the number of multicast channels in  
the current frequency.  
5 Frequency indicator  
6 Current time  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [c] or [d], you  
can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
4 Select a band  
7 Detailed information  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
band is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
8 Signal level indicator  
9 Blending mode indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the recep-  
a Signal type indicator  
Shows the type of signal currently being re-  
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,  
Dappears. Otherwise, Aappears.  
b Seek type indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the seek  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
HD RadioäReception  
16  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Switching the display  
Desired information can be displayed.  
%
Touch [Disp].  
Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the  
following settings:  
Channel name Artist name Song title —  
Program type  
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to  
an HD Radio broadcasting, display can be  
changed.  
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio broadcasting, default display is chan-  
ged into station name instead of frequency.  
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
#
Touch and hold [Disp].  
You can turn the detailed information scroll mode  
on and off.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [Digital Radio] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to display the Digital  
Radioscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch  
.
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, touch and hold a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P. C 1) is appears.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
2
3
4
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
2 Switching the seek mode  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
16  
HD RadioäReception  
= For details, refer to this page.  
3 Tuning in strong signals  
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
= For details, refer to this page.  
4 Switching the reception mode  
= For details, refer to this page.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and  
two levels for AM:  
FM: 1 2 3 4  
AM: 1 2  
p The FM 4(AM 2) setting allows recep-  
tion of only the strongest stations, while  
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-  
tions.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM(best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
Switching the reception mode  
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets  
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the  
analog broadcast of the same frequency level  
in default. If you want to prevent a frequent  
automatic switching, switch this setting to  
[Analog].  
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
%
Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-  
tion mode.  
!
!
[Analog]:  
Receives analog broadcasting only.  
[Auto]:  
Automatically switches to the analog broad-  
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-  
tal broadcast.  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
p If you select Analogon this setting while  
[Seek] is set to HD, the setting on [Seek]  
turns to Allautomatically.  
Switching the seek mode  
You can select the method of seek tuning.  
%
Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-  
ting.  
!
[All]:  
Seeks stations from both analog and digital  
broadcasting.  
!
[HD]:  
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.  
p If you select HDon this setting while  
[Blending] is set to Analog, the setting  
on [Blending] turns to Autoautomati-  
cally.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing audio CDs  
17  
You can play a normal music CD using the  
built-in drive of the navigation system. This  
section describes how.  
All tracks in the current disc  
are played in random order.  
Disc Random  
Disc Scan  
The beginning of each track  
is played for about 10 sec-  
onds.  
1
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.  
= For more information, refer to Using the  
4 Play time indicator  
2
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the CDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
5 Current time  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
6 Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the track and the total  
number of tracks in the repeat range.  
7 Track title indicator  
Shows the title of the track currently playing  
(when available).  
8 Artist name indicator  
to control the disc.  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
45  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
9 Album title indicator  
6
Shows the title of the album for the current  
track (when available).  
7
8
9
Using the touch panel keys  
Touch panel keys  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Track number indicator  
1
Shows the number of the track currently play-  
ing.  
3 Playback condition indicator  
The marks shown below appears and indi-  
cates the current playback condition.  
2
3
4
5
: Scan play  
: Random play  
: Repeat play  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
Indicator  
Meaning  
2 Switch the media file type played  
= For details, refer to Switch the media  
3 Skip the track forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current track. Touching it again will skip  
to the previous track.  
All tracks in the current disc  
are played repeatedly. This is  
the default condition.  
Disc Repeat  
The current track is played  
repeatedly.  
Track Repeat  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
17  
Playing audio CDs  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
2
Touch  
.
p Fast reverse is canceled when it reaches  
the beginning of the first track on the  
disc.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using TRK (c/d) button.  
4 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
5 Shuffle All  
1
2
3
4
All of the songs in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-  
dom] to [Off] on the Function”  
menu.  
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Disc Repeats the current disc  
Track Repeats just the current track  
p If you perform track search or fast for-  
ward/rewind, repeat play is automati-  
cally canceled.  
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles on a  
disc and select one of them to play.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
1
2
Touch [List].  
3 Scan tracks of a CD  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first  
10 seconds of each track on the CD. When  
you find the track you want, touch [Scan] to  
turn scan play off.  
Touch the track you want to play.  
p After scanning is finished, normal play-  
back of the tracks will begin again.  
4 Using advanced sound retriever  
Advanced sound retriever function automa-  
tically enhances compressed audio and re-  
stores rich sound.  
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes  
the setting as follows:  
The track currently playing is highlighted.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-  
responding information.  
!
!
!
MODE 1 Activates advanced sound  
retriever function.  
MODE 2 Activates advanced sound  
retriever function.  
Off Deactivates advanced sound re-  
triever function.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Detail].  
p MODE 2 is more effective than  
MODE 1.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the CDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
18  
You can play a disc that contains compressed  
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-  
gation system. This section describes these  
operations.  
p In the following description, the MP3,  
WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to  
as Compressed audio file.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
All audio files in the disc are  
played repeatedly. This is the  
default condition.  
Disc Repeat  
All audio files in the current  
folder are played repeatedly.  
Folder Repeat  
Track Repeat  
The current file is played re-  
peatedly.  
1
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.  
All audio files in the current  
disc are played in random  
order.  
Disc Random  
Folder Random  
Disc Scan  
2
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the ROMscreen.  
All audio files in the current  
folder are played in random  
order.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
3
Use this ROM screen to play the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
The beginning of the first  
audio files of each folder is  
played for about 10 seconds.  
The beginning of each file in  
the current folder is played  
for about 10 seconds.  
Folder Scan  
Reading the screen  
1
2 3 4 5 6  
78  
= For more information, refer to Using the  
6 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
7 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
8 Current time  
9
a
b
c
9 File number indicator  
Shows the number of the file and the total  
number of files in the repeat range.  
a Track title indicator  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
3 Folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
4 File indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing.  
5 Playback condition indicator  
The marks shown below appears and indi-  
cates the current playback condition.  
Shows the title of the track currently playing  
(when available).  
p If the title of a track is not available, the  
file name appears.  
b Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
c Album title indicator  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
track (when available).  
: Scan play  
: Random play  
: Repeat play  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
18  
Playing music files on ROM  
All of the songs in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
p If the disc contains a mixture of various  
media file types, all tracks within the  
current part (CDor ROM) are played  
randomly.  
p To cancel random play, switch [Ran-  
dom] to [Off] on the Functionmenu.  
2
3
4
5
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or  
folder names on a disc. Touch a folder on the  
list to view its contents. You can play a track  
on the list by touching it.  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Switch the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media files types to play.  
1
Touch [List].  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
2
Touch the folder that you want to view.  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files)  
p This touch panel key appears only when  
playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types.  
3 Skip the track forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current track. Touching it again will skip  
to the previous track.  
The track currently playing is highlighted.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p Fast rewind stops when it reaches the  
beginning of the first file on the repeat  
range.  
p In the case of compressed audio files,  
there is no sound on fast rewind or for-  
ward.  
Touching  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
displays the content of the upper  
3
Touch the track you want to play.  
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using TRK (c/d) button.  
Using the Functionmenu  
4 Playback and Pause  
1
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the ROMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
5 Shuffle All  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
18  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When you find the track you  
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After completion of track or folder scan-  
ning, normal playback of the tracks will  
begin again.  
2
Touch  
.
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] when the re-  
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-  
peat play range is set to [Disc], scan  
play is performed for only the first tracks  
of each folder.  
1
2
3
4
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
4 Using advanced sound retriever  
Advanced sound retriever function automa-  
tically enhances compressed audio and re-  
stores rich sound.  
!
Disc Repeats all compressed audio  
files  
Track Repeats just the current track  
Folder Repeats the current folder  
!
!
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes  
the setting as follows:  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-  
ing [Track], the repeat play range  
changes to [Folder].  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to play back a subfolder of that  
folder.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within the cur-  
rently playing data session even if [Disc]  
is selected.  
!
!
!
MODE 1 Activates advanced sound  
retriever function.  
MODE 2 Activates advanced sound  
retriever function.  
Off Deactivates advanced sound re-  
triever function.  
p MODE 2 is more effective than  
MODE 1.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in  
the current repeat play range are randomly  
played.  
p If you turn [Random] to [On] when the  
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
3 Scan folders and tracks  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each track. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
Reading the screen  
2
1
2
3
4
56  
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
Playback screen (page2)  
1
7
8
9 ab  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Title number indicator  
a
b
Shows the title number currently playing.  
3 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
4 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows which digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
5 Play time indicator  
c
5
6
d
e
Playback screen (page3)  
1
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current title.  
6 Current time  
7 Audio track indicator  
f
g
h
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-  
guage currently selected.  
8 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as Mch(Multi-channel).  
5
6
9 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
a Subtitle language indicator  
Shows the subtitle language currently se-  
lected.  
b Viewing angle indicator  
Shows what viewing angle has been  
selected.  
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Display the DVD menu  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]  
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-  
ing either of these keys again lets you start  
playback from the location selected from the  
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-  
vided with the disc.  
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed  
for five seconds.  
d Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
3 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
e Perform an operation (such as resuming)  
that is stored on the disc  
When using a DVD that has a point recorded  
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-  
turns to the specified point and begins play-  
back from that point.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
4 Playback and Pause  
f Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)  
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-  
ing angles.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
5 Switch the display  
p During playback of a scene shot from  
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the  
information plate as follows:  
Disc information display Repeat range and  
L/R select display  
multiple angles, the angle icon  
is  
displayed. Turn the angle icon display  
on or off using the DVD/DivX® Setup”  
menu.  
6 Hide the touch panel keys  
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon  
g Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
7 Display the DVD menu keypad  
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by  
8 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
9 Stop playback  
a Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
h Change audio language and audio sys-  
tems (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio languages and audio systems.  
p DTS audio cannot be output, so select  
an audio setting other than DTS.  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch indicate the audio system re-  
corded on the DVD. Depending on the  
setting, playback may not use the same  
audio system as that indicated.  
b Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
c Fast reverse or forward  
Resuming playback (Bookmark)  
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-  
back from a selected scene the next time the  
disc is loaded.  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
%
Touching [BookM.]:  
Direct number search  
You can use this function when you need to  
enter a numerical command during DVD play-  
back.  
You can bookmark one point for each of up to  
five discs. If you try to memorize another point  
for the same disc, the oldest bookmark will be  
overwritten by the newest one.  
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and  
1
Touch [10Key].  
hold [BookM.].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
number.  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
You can search for the scene you want by spe-  
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
Operating the DVD menu  
You can operate the DVD menu by touching  
the menu item on the screen directly.  
p This function can be used when the  
key is displayed on the lower right corner of  
the LCD screen.  
p This function may not work properly with  
some DVD disc content. In that case, use  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
p If you touch the screen while  
is dis-  
played, the touch panel keys will not be dis-  
played.  
1
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
2
Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD  
menu.  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
For titles, chapters  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
3
#
Touch the desired menu item.  
Touch  
.
The touch panel keys to select the menu item are  
displayed.  
For time (time search)  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.  
Using DVD menu by touch  
panel keys  
If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch  
panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an  
item using those touch panel keys.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
1
Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the  
desired menu item.  
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback  
speed during slow motion playback.  
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes  
the speed in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-  
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the  
screen, then touching  
again.  
displays them  
Using the Functionmenu  
2
Touch [Enter].  
1
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
Playback starts from the selected menu item.  
The way to display the menu differs depending  
on the disc.  
to display the DVD-Vscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
#
Touch [Position].  
Each touch of [Position] changes the display po-  
sition of touch panel keys.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
#
Touch [Hide].  
The touch panel keys are hidden.  
3
Touch  
.
And  
is displayed, so you can select a  
menu item by touching the screen.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Disc Plays throughout the current  
disc  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
!
!
Title Repeats just the current title  
Chapter Repeats just the current  
chapter  
1
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
motion playback begins.  
is dis-  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
2 Selecting audio output  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears in the display.  
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
!
L+R Left and right  
L Left  
R Right  
Mix Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
20  
You can play a DVD-VR (DVD Video Recording  
Format) disc using the built-in drive of the na-  
vigation system. This section describes opera-  
tions for DVD-VR discs.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
Reading the screen  
3
4
1
2
3
4
56  
5
6
7
8
9
a
Playback screen (page2)  
1
7
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Title number indicator  
Shows the title number currently playing.  
3 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
4 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows which digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
5 Play time indicator  
8
9
a
b
c
d
e
6
7
f g  
9
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 c CM Skip/CM Skip d  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current title.  
6 Current time  
7 Audio track indicator  
= For details, refer to Using the short-time  
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
3 Switch the playback mode  
= For details, refer to Switch the playback  
8 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as Mch(Multi-channel).  
4 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
5 Playback and Pause  
9 Play mode indicator  
Shows the current play mode.  
= For details, refer to Switch the playback  
a Mixing condition indicator  
Shows the current mixing condition.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
6 Switch the display  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
Touching [Disp] changes the information as  
follows:  
Disc information display Repeat range dis-  
play  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for the scene you want by spe-  
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
7 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
8 Display the title list  
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.  
9 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
a Stop playback  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
b Change audio tracks (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks.  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch indicate the audio system re-  
corded on the DVD. Depending on the  
setting, playback may not use the same  
audio system as that indicated.  
c Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
For titles, chapters  
d Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
e Fast reverse or forward  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
For time (time search)  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed  
for five seconds.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
f Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
g Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
Switch the playback mode  
You have two methods for playing DVD-VR  
discs; Original (original) and Playlist (play-  
list).  
20  
p Touching or switches the selection to  
the next or previous page in the list.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[List].  
p Titles created with DVD recorders are  
called original. Those based on original, re-  
arranged titles are called playlist. Playlists  
are created on DVD-R/-RW discs.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
%
Touch [Mode Change] to switch the  
play mode.  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
If the play mode is changed, playback starts  
from the beginning of the selected play mode.  
one frame.  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Using the short-time skip function  
This function enables you to skip over your  
specified interval on the video playback. This  
is useful to skip commercials on your recorded  
DVD-VR disc.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
%
To skip progressively backward or for-  
1
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
ward, touch [c CM Skip] or [CM Skip d].  
Each touch of [c CM Skip] or [CM Skip d]  
changes steps in the following order:  
c CM Skip  
motion playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
5 sec. 15 sec. 30 sec. 1 min. 2 min.  
3 min. 0 sec.  
CM Skip d  
30 sec. 1 min. 1.5 min. 2 min. 3 min.  
5 min. 10 min. 0 sec.  
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback  
speed during slow motion playback.  
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes  
the speed in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
Playing by selecting from the  
title list  
You can select and play the title you want from  
the list.  
1
2
Touch [List] on the playback screen.  
Touch the title to play from the list.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the DVD-VRscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Playing a DVD-VR disc  
3
Touch  
.
Function menu  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Title Repeats just the current title  
Chapter Repeats just the current  
chapter  
!
Disc Plays throughout the current  
disc  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
2 Selecting audio output  
When playing DVDs that both channels are  
recorded in monaural, you can switch the  
audio output. Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly  
until the desired audio output appears in  
the display.  
!
!
!
!
L+R Left and right  
L Left  
R Right  
Mix Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
21  
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes that operations.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
56  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Playback screen (page2)  
1
7
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
3 File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing.  
4 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) currently selected.  
5 Play time indicator  
8
9
a
a
b
c
d
5
6
e
8
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
file.  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Switch the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media files types to play.  
6 Current time  
7 Audio track indicator  
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
8 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as Mch(Multi-channel).  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
9 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
a Repeat range indicator  
Shows which repeat range has been  
selected.  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files)  
p This touch panel key appears only when  
playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types.  
3 Skip forward or backward  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
Playing a DivX video  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
4 Playback and Pause  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
5 Switch the information  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-  
formation panel as follows:  
Disc information display Current folder dis-  
play File name display  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
6 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
%
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
motion playback begins.  
7 Display the title list  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.  
8 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
9 Stop playback  
a Change audio tracks (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks.  
b Change the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
or [m], etc.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
c Fast reverse or forward  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing the time.  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed  
for five seconds.  
p Time search are not possible when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
1
Touch [Search].  
d Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
e Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
21  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
3
Touch  
.
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
For time (time search)  
Function menu  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
1
2
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
Playing by selecting from the  
title list  
You can select and play the title you want from  
the list.  
!
!
!
File Repeat just the current file  
Folder Repeat just the current folder  
Disc Plays throughout the current  
disc  
1
Touch [List] on the playback screen.  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-  
ing [File], the repeat play range changes  
to [Folder].  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
2
Touch the title to play from the list.  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to play back a subfolder of that  
folder.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within DivX vi-  
deos even if [Disc] is selected.  
2 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
p Touching or switches the selection to  
the next or previous page in the list.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[List].  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the DivXscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Configure the DVD-Video/DVD-VR/DivX player.  
3
Touch the desired language.  
When you select [Others], a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup  
menu  
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video,  
DVD-VR or DivX.  
p If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]  
during playback.  
2
Touch [Disc] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the normal playback screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to  
switch the subtitle or audio language, this  
does not affect the settings here.  
3
Touch  
.
The Functionmenu appears.  
4
Touch [DVD/DivX® Setup].  
The DVD/DivX® Setupscreen appears.  
Setting the angle icon display  
You can set the angle icon  
to display in  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
1
Display the DVD/DivX® Setupscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
2
Touch [Multi Angle].  
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between  
5
Touch the desired function.  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting the top-priority  
languages  
You can assign the top-priority language to the  
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial  
playback. If the selected language is recorded  
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-  
played or output in that language.  
Setting the aspect ratio  
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen  
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)  
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a  
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio  
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend  
use of this function only when you want to fit it  
to the rear display.)  
1
Display the DVD/DivX® Setupscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
p When using a regular display, select either  
Letter Boxor Panscan. Selecting  
16:9may result in an unnatural picture.  
2
Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-  
guage] or [Menu Language].  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
1
Display the DVD/DivX® Setupscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
22  
2
Touch [TV Aspect].  
4
While the input number is displayed,  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting  
as follows:  
touch [Enter].  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
!
16:9 Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-  
played as it is (initial setting)  
5
Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-  
!
Letter Box The picture is in the shape of  
a letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen  
Panscan The picture is cut short at the  
right and left of the screen  
sired level.  
The parental lock level is set.  
!
Level 8 Playback of the entire disc is  
possible (initial setting)  
!
!
Level 7 to Level 2 Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible  
Level 1 Only playback of discs for chil-  
dren is possible  
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-  
scan system, the disc is played back with  
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]  
setting. Confirm whether the disc package  
!
bears the  
mark.  
p If you want to change the parental level al-  
ready set, enter the registered code number  
and then select the parental level.  
p Some discs do not enable changing of the  
TV aspect. For details, refer to the discs in-  
structions.  
p We recommend that you keep a record of  
your code number in case you forget it.  
p The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, the included literature or the  
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock  
with discs that do not feature a recorded  
parental lock level.  
p With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which normal  
playback resumes. For details, refer to the  
discs instructions.  
Setting the parental lock  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental  
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot  
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You  
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-  
sired.  
p When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code  
number input indications may be dis-  
played. In this case, playback will begin  
when the correct code number is input.  
p If you forget the registered code number,  
touch  
10 times on the number input  
screen. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
Setting the code number and level  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code  
number, parental lock will not operate.  
Setting Auto Play”  
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,  
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-  
cally and start playback from the first chapter  
of the first title.  
1
Display the DVD/DivX® Setupscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If  
this function is not fully operable, turn this  
function off and start playback.  
2
3
Touch [Parental Level].  
Touch [0] to [9] to input a four digit  
code number.  
1
Display the DVD/DivX® Setupscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
2
Touch [Auto Play].  
Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-  
tween [On] and [Off].  
p When [Auto Play] is set to [On], the repeat  
range is automatically set to [Disc].  
Setting the subtitle file for  
DivX  
You can select whether to display DivX exter-  
nal subtitles or not.  
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the  
original DivX subtitles are displayed even  
when [Custom] is selected.  
1
Display the DVD/DivX® Setupscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
2
Touch [Subtitle File].  
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting  
between [Original] and [Custom].  
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on  
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,  
the line breaks and the characters are dis-  
played on the next line.  
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on  
one screen. If more than 126 characters are  
set, the excess characters will not be dis-  
played.  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-  
responding subtitle files exist.  
p Up to three lines can be displayed at  
once.  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Language code chart for DVDs  
22  
Language (code), input code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
Spanish (es), 0519  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Language (code), input code  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Language (code), input code  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Rumanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Sango (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Shinghalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Belorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Thai (th), 2008  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tongan (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
23  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
You can play the compressed audio files  
stored in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-  
rage device.  
1 Source icon  
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the external storage  
device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
USB storage device.  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
4 File number indicator  
5 Playback condition indicator  
The marks shown below appears and indi-  
cates the current playback condition.  
: Scan play  
Starting procedure  
: Random play  
: Repeat play  
1
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
Indicator  
Meaning  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
All audio files in the current  
external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played repeat-  
edly. This is the default con-  
dition.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
Media Repeat  
2
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
All audio files in the current  
folder are played repeatedly.  
menu to display the USBor SDscreen.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
number. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-  
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback  
starts from folder 02.)  
Folder Repeat  
Track Repeat  
The current file is played re-  
peatedly.  
All audio files in the current  
external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played in ran-  
dom order.  
Media Random  
All audio files in the current  
folder are played in random  
order.  
Reading the screen  
Folder Random  
Media Scan  
1
2 3 4 5 6  
7
8
The beginning of the first  
audio files of each folder is  
played for about 10 seconds.  
9
The beginning of each track  
in the current folder is  
played for about 10 seconds.  
Folder Scan  
a
b
c
= For more information, refer to Using the  
6 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
7 Play time indicator  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
8 Current time  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
23  
9 Current file number and total number of  
files  
Shows the file number currently played and  
the total number of playable audio files.  
a Track title indicator  
3 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
Shows the title of the track currently playing  
(when available).  
p If the title of a track is not available, the  
file name appears.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-  
ward.  
b Artist name indicator*  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
c Album title indicator*  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
4 Playback and Pause  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
track (when available).  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
p The information marked with an asterisk (*)  
is displayed only when the information has  
been encoded on the compressed audio  
files. If specific information has not been  
encoded on the files, “—” is displayed in-  
stead.  
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or  
folder names on an external storage device  
(USB, SD). Touch a folder on the list to view its  
contents. Touch a track on the list to play that  
track.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Music)  
1
Touch [List].  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
#
1
Touch and hold [List].  
The contents of the root folder are displayed.  
2
2
Touch the folder that you want to view.  
3
4
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. This touch panel key is  
available only when there are both audio and  
video files in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
The track currently playing is highlighted.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
Touching  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
displays the content of the upper  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
23  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
3
Touch the track you want to play.  
of each track. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When you find the track you  
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After all tracks or folders scanning are  
finished, normal playback will begin  
again.  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-  
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu to display the USBor SDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch  
.
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Media Repeat all compressed audio  
files in the selected external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD)  
!
!
Track Repeat just the current track  
Folder Repeat the current folder  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in Track,  
the repeat play range changes to  
Folder.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Random play lets you playback tracks in  
random order within the current repeat  
range.  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
p If you turn [Random] to [On] while the  
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
3 Scan folders and tracks  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
24  
You can play the video files stored in the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-  
rage device.  
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the external storage  
device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
USB storage device.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
4 File number indicator  
5 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
7 Current time  
Starting procedure  
1
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Video)  
1
2
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu to display each operation screen.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
number. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-  
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback  
starts from folder 02.)  
2
3
4
5
6
Reading the screen  
7
8
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
1
2 3 4  
5
6
7
2 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. This touch panel key is  
available only when there are both audio and  
video files in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
3 Searching for a desired scene and starting  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
4 Skip forward or backward  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
24  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Detail].  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing the time.  
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-  
ward.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
5 Playback and Pause  
1
Touch [Search].  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
6 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
7 Stop playback  
8 Display the title list  
Displays the title list recorded on the external  
storage device (USB, SD).  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [s] and [Enter] in order.  
Playing by selecting from the  
title list  
You can select and play the title you want from  
the list.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
1
Touch [List] on the playback screen.  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
#
Touch and hold [List].  
The contents of the root folder are displayed.  
2
Touch the title to play from the list.  
p Touching or switches the selection to  
the next or previous page in the list.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
24  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the AV Source”  
menu to display the USBor SDscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
3
Touch  
.
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,  
touch anywhere on the screen to display  
them.  
1
2
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Media Repeat all video files in the se-  
lected external storage device (USB, SD)  
File Repeat just the current file  
!
!
Folder Repeat the current folder  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in File, the  
repeat play range changes to Folder.  
2 Changing the screen size of video  
If a video file is played, you can select the  
display mode between normal and full  
screen.  
Each touch of [Video Output Setting]  
changes the setting as follows:  
!
Normal Video files appear in normal  
size.  
!
Full Video files appear in a full-  
screen.  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
1 Source icon  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the current chapter number and total  
number of chapters when the file with chap-  
ters played.  
3 Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the song currently play-  
ing and total number of songs in the selected  
list.  
Starting procedure  
%
Connect your iPod.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
4 Shuffle play indicator  
Appears when shuffle play is activated.  
5 Repeat play indicator  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
Appears when repeat play is activated.  
: All-tracks repeat  
: One-track repeat  
p If the iPod is already connected, touch  
[iPod] on the AV Sourcemenu.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p No video output if iPod is selected as AV  
source, check the setting in AV1 Inputon  
the AV System Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
6 Current time  
7 Album artwork  
Album art of the current song is displayed if it  
is available.  
8 Song title (episode) indicator  
Shows the title of the current song. When a  
podcast is played, the episode is displayed.  
9 Artist name (podcast title) indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When a podcast is played, the podcast title is  
displayed.  
Reading the screen  
Music  
a Album title (release date) indicator  
Shows the title of the album for the song.  
When a podcast is played, the release date is  
displayed.  
1
2 3 45  
6
b Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current song.  
p If characters recorded on the iPod are not  
compatible with this navigation system,  
they may turn into garbled characters.  
7
8
9
a
b
Video  
1
6
2
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
25  
of the current song. Touching again will skip  
to the previous song. When the track with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Music)  
2
3
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
4
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
7 Playback and Pause  
5
6
1
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
8 Shuffle All  
7
8
All songs (except for the track in Audio-  
booksand Podcasts) in your iPod can be  
played randomly.  
p To cancel the random play, switch  
[Shuffle] on the Functionmenu to the  
Off.  
1 Album artwork  
Touch the key to enlarge the album artwork. If  
you touch again, the artwork returns to its nor-  
mal size.  
2 Category tabs  
Shows the list to narrow down the songs. If  
you want to use the list of Audiobooks,  
Composersor Songs, touch [MENU] to  
display the lists.  
Browsing for a song  
Touch an item on list to search for a song and  
3 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
4 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. After you touch the key,  
the top category menu appears to let you se-  
lect the item for playback.  
play it on your iPod.  
Narrowing down listed songs  
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-  
play the song or track list.  
!
!
!
!
!
Playlists (playlists)  
Genres (genres)  
Artists (artists)  
Albums (albums)  
Podcasts (podcasts)  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
The search screen is displayed.  
p If iPod fifth generation is connected, the  
following settings are automatically  
changed when the operation screen is  
switched to the screen to operate video  
files.  
!
[Repeat] is set to [All].  
[Shuffle] is set to [Off].  
!
5 Display the top category menu  
Touching the key displays the top category be-  
fore you use the category tabs. If you select  
the song using the category tabs to play,  
touching the key displays the previous list.  
6 Skip back or forward to another song  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
song. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
2
Touching or switches the selection  
to the next or previous page in the list.  
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Refine the item until the track title is displayed  
on the list.  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
p Touching [All] on the list includes all op-  
tions in the current list. For example, if you  
touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can  
proceed to the next screen with all artists in  
the list selected.  
4
Touch the character key to display the  
page which includes applicable options.  
5
On the song (or episode) list, touch the  
track you want to play.  
p After you select Artists, Albums, or  
Genres, go on to touch one of the list to  
start playing the first songs in the selected  
list and display the next options.  
Touch and hold the item that you want to re-  
fine.  
Operating this navigation  
system's iPod function  
from your iPod  
This navigation systems iPod function can be  
operated from your iPod. Sound can be heard  
from the cars speakers, and operation can be  
conducted from your iPod.  
This function can be operated with the follow-  
ing iPod models:  
Even if [Change Control Mode] is set to  
[iPod], following functions are available from  
this navigation system.  
#
Plays back the files related to the touched item.  
4
On the song (or episode) list, touch the  
track you want to play.  
p After you select the track using this func-  
tion, touching [MENU] displays the list pre-  
viously selected.  
Searching for applicable items  
alphabetically  
Using the search control displays the page  
which includes the first applicable option.  
p This function is available for the alphabeti-  
cal list only.  
!
!
!
!
Playback and Pause  
Fast reverse or forward  
Skip forward or backward  
Adjusting the volume  
Starting the video playback  
This navigation system can play video if an  
iPod with video capabilities is connected.  
1
Touch [Video].  
2
Touch one of the categories in that con-  
tains the video you want to play.  
Search control  
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-  
play the list.  
2
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.  
p An article listed below and space at the be-  
ginning of the artist name will be ignored  
and the next character will be taken into ac-  
count for searching.  
Video playback will start.  
3
Touch your desired item on the list to  
— “Aor a”  
— “AN, An, or an”  
— “THE, The, or the”  
narrow down them until the video list ap-  
pears.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
25  
If you touch and hold [o] or [p] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [o] or [p].  
4
On the video list, touch the video you  
want to play.  
5
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
= For more details of the operation, refer to  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK (c/d) button.  
5 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
6 Display the top category menu for video  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
video playback.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Video)  
1
7 Hide the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
2
3
4
Browsing for a video  
Touching the item on list allows you to search  
for a video and play it in your iPod.  
5
6
7
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Switch the operation screen  
Touching this key switches between the  
screen to operate music files and the screen  
to operate video files. After you touch the key,  
the top category menu appears to let you se-  
lect the item for playback.  
Narrowing down a video with the list  
1
Touch [MENU] or [Top Menu].  
The search screen is displayed.  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
3 Display the previous selected list  
If you select the video from the list to play  
after touching Top Menu, touching the key  
displays the previous list.  
2
3
Touch the category you want.  
Touching or switches the selection  
4 Skip back or forward to another song  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current video. Touching again will skip  
to the previous video. When the video with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
to the next or previous page in the list.  
4
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Refine the item until the track title is displayed  
on the list.  
5
On the video list, touch the video you  
want to play.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast rewind  
or fast forward.  
p After you select the video using this func-  
tion, touching [MENU] displays the list pre-  
viously selected.  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
2
Touch  
.
Searching for applicable items  
alphabetically  
1
2
3
4
Using the search control displays the page  
which includes the first applicable option.  
p This function is available for the alphabeti-  
cal list only.  
5
6
1 Setting repeat play  
There are two repeat play types for play-  
back.  
Search control  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
1
2
3
Touch the category you want.  
!
!
One Repeats just the current track  
All Repeats all tracks in the selected  
list  
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.  
p An article listed below and space at the be-  
ginning of the artist name will be ignored  
and the next character will be taken into ac-  
count for searching.  
2 Setting the shuffle play for music  
This function shuffles songs or albums and  
plays them in random order.  
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting  
as follows:  
— “Aor a”  
— “AN, An, or an”  
— “THE, The, or the”  
!
!
Off Does not shuffle.  
Songs Plays back songs in random  
order within the selected list  
Albums Selects an album randomly,  
and then plays back all songs in that  
album in order  
4
Touch the character key to display the  
page which includes applicable options.  
!
5
On the video list, touch the video you  
3 Setting the audiobook play speed  
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,  
playback speed can be changed.  
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the  
setting as follows:  
want to play.  
Using the Functionmenu  
p If [Change Control Mode] is set to [iPod],  
only the setting of [Change Control Mode]  
is available.  
!
!
Normal Playback in normal speed  
Faster Playback faster than normal  
speed  
!
Slower Playback slower than normal  
speed  
1
Touch [iPod] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the control screen for iPod.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
4 Playback video in wide screen mode  
If the video is compatible with wide screen  
format, set [Widescreen] to [On] in order to  
view the video image in the wide screen.  
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the  
setting as follows:  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
25  
!
!
On Outputs the wide-screen video  
from iPod  
Off Outputs the normal-sized video  
from iPod  
p Display size is changed after you  
change Widescreensetting and select  
the video to play.  
p This setting is available only during the  
video operation.  
5 Setting iPod control mode  
While the control mode is set to iPod, you  
can operate iPod function from the con-  
nected iPod.  
Each touch of [Change Control Mode]  
changes the setting as follows:  
!
Navi This navigation systems iPod  
function can be operated from this navi-  
gation system.  
!
iPod This navigation systems iPod  
function can be operated from the con-  
nected iPod.  
6 Playing songs related to the currently  
playing song  
Songs related to the currently playing song  
are played. You can play songs of the follow-  
ing lists.  
!
!
!
Artist list of currently playing genre  
Album list of currently playing artist  
Song list of currently playing album  
p This setting is available only during the  
music operation.  
p Depending on the number of files in the  
iPod, there may be a delay when display-  
ing a list.  
!
!
!
Link Artists Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing artist will be played.  
Link Albums Songs related to the  
currently playing album will be played.  
Link Genre Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing genre will be played.  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
26  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
You can control the Bluetooth audio player  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology.  
p Before using the Bluetooth audio player,  
you need to register and connect the device  
to this navigation system.  
%
Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to display the  
Bluetooth Audioscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
= For more details of the operation, refer  
to Chapter 11.  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
connected to this navigation system, the  
available operations with this navigation  
system are limited to the following two le-  
vels:  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-  
tion Profile): Only playing back songs on  
your audio player is possible.  
AVRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote  
Control Profile): Playing back, pausing,  
selecting songs, etc., are possible.  
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth  
audio players available on the market, op-  
erations with your Bluetooth audio player  
using this navigation system vary greatly in  
range. Please refer to the instruction man-  
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio  
player as well as this manual while operat-  
ing your player on this navigation system.  
p While you are listening to songs on your  
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from  
operating your cellular phone as much as  
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-  
lar phone, the signal from your cellular  
phone may cause a noise on the song play-  
back.  
p Even if you switch to another source while  
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio  
player, the playback of song continues to  
elapse.  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
you connected to this navigation system,  
operations on this navigation system to  
control the player may differ from those ex-  
plained in this manual.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Device name  
3 Bluetooth connection status indicator  
4 Current time  
If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3, the following items will be  
displayed.  
!
!
Track number indicator  
Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current track.  
Track title indicator  
Shows the title of the track currently play-  
ing (when available).  
Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
Album title indicator  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
track (when available).  
Playback condition indicator  
The marks shown below appears and indi-  
cates the current playback condition (when  
available).  
!
!
!
!
p When you are talking on a cellular phone  
connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire-  
less technology, song playback from your  
Bluetooth audio player connected to this  
unit is paused.  
: Random play  
: Repeat play  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
26  
Using the Functionmenu  
Indicator  
Meaning  
p This menu is available only when the con-  
nected Bluetooth audio player features  
AVRCP 1.3.  
All Repeat  
All audio files in the current  
Bluetooth audio player are  
played repeatedly. This is the  
default condition.  
All Repeat Ran-  
dom  
1
Touch [Bluetooth Audio] on the AV  
Track Repeat  
Sourcemenu to display the  
Bluetooth Audioscreen.  
The current file is played re-  
peatedly.  
Track Repeat  
Random  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
All audio files in the current  
Bluetooth audio player are  
played in random order.  
Random  
2
Touch  
.
= For more information, refer to Using the  
p In the following cases, track information  
will only be displayed after a track starts or  
resumes playing:  
You connect the Bluetooth audio player  
compatible with AVRCP1.3, and operate  
the player to start playing.  
You select another track when playback  
is paused.  
1
2
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
Using the touch panel keys  
!
All Repeats all compressed audio  
files in the Bluetooth audio player  
Track Repeats just the current track  
Off Does not repeat.  
1
!
!
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in Track,  
the repeat play range changes to All.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Random play lets you playback tracks in  
random order within the current repeat  
range.  
2
3
Touching [Random] switches between On”  
and Off.  
1 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
2 Playback and Pause  
Touching [d] or [e] switches between play-  
back and pause.  
3 Connect the Bluetooth audio player  
Touching [Connect] connects the Bluetooth  
audio player manually.  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the XM tuner  
You can use the navigation system to control  
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-  
parately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
XM tuners operation manuals. This section  
provides information on XM operations with  
the navigation system which differs from that  
described in the XM tuners operation man-  
ual.  
About the logo for channel name  
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-  
vigation system can be displayed for each  
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-  
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.  
When no logo may be displayed, the following  
substitute icon is displayed.  
Substitute icon  
The following XM satellite digital tuner units  
cannot be connected:  
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM  
p The icon of each broadcast station is con-  
tained in the NAND flash memory based  
on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio  
as of March 2009.  
p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio  
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-  
tion in the future may not be supported by  
the navigation system, and may cause the  
unit to display incorrect icons.  
Reading the screen  
ALL CH MODE  
1
2
3
4
56  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 XM band indicator  
Shows the XM band that has been selected.  
3 Preset number indicator  
7
8
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 XM channel number indicator  
Shows the XM channel number the tuner is  
currently tuned to.  
9
a
CATEGORY MODE  
5 XM channel category  
Shows the category of broadcast channel.  
6 Current time  
1
2
3
4
56  
7 XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in ALL CH MODE, and select a  
channel from selected category in  
CATEGORY MODE.  
7
8
9
a
8 XM station name logo  
p The message ON THE AIRdisappears  
if the navigation system cannot receive  
XM tuner reception for some reason.  
9 XM station name indicator  
Shows the XM broadcast station name the  
tuner is currently tuned in.  
a Detail information  
Shows the detailed information of the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
27  
6 Preset key for receiving the traffic  
audio service  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [XM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the XMscreen.  
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic  
7 Switching the XM channel select mode  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the chan-  
nel.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
ALL CH MODE  
1
2
ALL CH MODE:  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
CATEGORY MODE:  
3
You can select a channel within a selected  
category that you operate this function.  
8 Selecting an XM channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM chan-  
4
5
9 Switching to the list display  
You can select the desired channel from the  
list display.  
6 7 8 9  
CATEGORY MODE  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
1
2
a Switching the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
a
4
5
Selecting an XM channel directly  
You can select an XM channel directly by en-  
tering the desired channel number.  
6 7 8 9  
1
2
Touch [Direct].  
1 Memorize the current song  
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
2 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the Function”  
3 Recalling channels from the preset  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
4 Perform manual tuning  
The channels move up or down one at a  
time.  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch  
.
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The XM channel that was entered is selected.  
4
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can  
skip the broadcasting channels.  
5 Select an XM band  
Displaying the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
XM band is displayed: XM 1, XM 2 or  
XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset  
item.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the XM tuner  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
2
Touch the desired channel that you  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
want to listen to.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast channels for later recall (also with  
the touch of a key).  
Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-  
vious page.  
p During CATEGORY MODE, touch [c] or  
[d] to switch to another category.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
Using My Mixfunction  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key [P1] to [P6], the station is recalled from  
memory.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-  
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-  
ing the ALL CH MODE.  
My Mixfunction memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the  
song title and the artist name are memor-  
ized.  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized to My Mix.  
Selecting a channel from the list  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the track you want to listen to not  
only by the channel name but also by the artist  
name or song title.  
p The channel list shows all channels during  
ALL CH MODE, and the channels included  
in the selected category during  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of current song  
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-  
firmation message appears.  
p The song title and artist name of up to 12  
songs can be memorized. Trying to save  
more than 12 songs will result in older ones  
being overwritten.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p This function is invalid for the channel  
000.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly depending on the conditions.  
CATEGORY MODE. To switch the channel  
mode, touch [Mode].  
1
Touch [List].  
XM channel list appears in the display.  
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-  
lows:  
Detail information display or Preset list  
display CH Name List (Channel name) —  
Song Title List (Song title) —  
Artist Name List (Artist name)  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
27  
p You can customize the setting for the mem-  
orized songs later.  
Tuning in to the memorized channel  
%
Touch [Traffic].  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [Traffic] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
p You can even call up a Instant Traffic &  
Weatherchannel from a source other than  
the XM source.  
p To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC  
Off] on the screen.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the memorized song is not checked or  
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on  
MEMO Editscreen, no alert will be pro-  
vided.  
Using the Functionmenu  
1
Touch [XM] on the AV Sourcemenu  
to display the XMscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the status of the Navigation System.  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
song being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
2
Touch  
.
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to the memorized Instant Traf-  
fic & Weatherchannel by directly calling it up  
with [Traffic]. (Only one station can be memor-  
ized.)  
1
1 Setting the memorized songs  
Memorizing an Instant Traffic &  
Weatherchannel  
1
Tune into Instant Traffic & Weather”  
channel.  
2
Touch and hold [Traffic] for two sec-  
onds or more.  
That Instant Traffic & Weatherchannel will  
be memorized.  
p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner together, only one station can be  
memorized. The station memorized after-  
ward will overwrite the existing one.  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the XM tuner  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix  
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can  
change the notification setting when the song  
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable  
notification for each song.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch the song title that you want to  
exclude from the notification list.  
The check mark is removed, and the song title  
is excluded from the notification list.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
Touch to toggle the selection.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
songs from the song title list.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch and hold the song you want to  
delete.  
p To delete all songs that are memorized,  
touch [Delete All].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
28  
3 Preset number indicator  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
Pioneer Sirius Satellite Radio tuner, which is  
sold separately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
SIRIUS tuners operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-  
tions with navigation system which differs  
from that described in the SIRIUS tuners op-  
eration manual.  
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation  
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is  
required. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owners manual of Pioneer SIR-  
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect  
universal tuner.  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the  
tuner is tuned to.  
5 Current time  
6 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All Ch Mode, and select a chan-  
nel from the selected category in  
Category Mode.  
= For details, refer to Switch the SIRIUS  
7 Variable information area  
Shows various information about the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
= For more details about the displayed in-  
formation, refer to Switch the SIRIUS  
Reading the screen  
All Ch Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [SIRIUS] on the AV Source”  
6
7
menu to display the SIRIUSscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
All Ch Mode  
1 2  
3
Category Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
4
6
7
5
6
7 8 9  
a
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 SIRIUS band indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-  
lected.  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
You can select a channel within a selected  
category that you operate this function.  
9 Select a SIRIUS channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS  
a Switch the SIRIUS display  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display  
information.  
Channel number Channel name —  
Channel category Artist name/feature —  
Song/program title Composer  
b Switch the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
Category Mode  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
7 8 9  
a
1 Memorize the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
2 Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode  
= For details, refer to Using the Instant  
3 Display the Functionmenu  
= For details, refer to Using the Function”  
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by  
entering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
4 Recalling channels from the preset  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
5 Perform manual tuning  
The channels move up or down one at a  
time.  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch  
.
3
While the input number is displayed,  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can  
skip the broadcasting channels.  
6 Select a SIRIUS band  
touch [Enter].  
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-  
lected.  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,  
SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful for  
switching the preset.  
4
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
7 Preset key for receiving the traffic  
audio service  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic  
1
Touch [Direct].  
8 Switch the SIRIUS channel select  
mode  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the chan-  
nel.  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
All Ch Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
Category Mode:  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
28  
p You cannot memorize a song that does not  
have song title and artist name information.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of channel 000.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6], you can easily store up  
to six broadcast stations for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
store in memory.  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch to that station, and you can listen to  
that track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does  
not switch.  
p If the alert for the song is Offor set  
[Alert] to [Off], no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that song is broadcast.  
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key [Preset 1] to [Preset 6] the station is re-  
called from memory.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-  
tions assigned to preset tuning keys  
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6] in the detailed infor-  
mation display during All Ch Mode.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel  
by directly calling it up with the [Traffic] (Only  
one station can be memorized).  
Using My Mixfunction  
The MyMix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-  
ized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
Memorizing an traffic channel  
1
Tune in to a traffic channel.  
2
Touch and hold [Traffic] for two sec-  
onds or more.  
The traffic channel will be memorized.  
p Even if you use this with the XM satellite di-  
gital tuner, only one station can be memor-  
ized. The station memorized afterward will  
overwrite the existing one.  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
p The channels 000 can not be memorized.  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to are memorized, and  
[Song and artist have been saved.] is dis-  
played.  
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be  
memorized.  
Tuning in to the memorized channel  
%
Touch [Traffic].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [Traffic] on the AV Source”  
menu.  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
p To cancel a traffic announcement, touch  
2
Touch  
.
[TRFC Off].  
Using the Instant Replayfunction  
The Instant Replayfunction allows you to  
replay the stored broadcast on Pioneer SIRIUS  
BUS INTERFACE (if Pioneer SIRIUS BUS IN-  
TERFACE capable for this function). As soon  
as you tune to a channel, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS  
INTERFACE automatically begins storing the  
broadcast. It can store approximately up to 44  
minutes previous (depending on the selected  
channel and the memory capacity of Pioneer  
SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE).  
1
2
3
1 Setting the memorized songs  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Using the Game Alert function  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
3 Displaying Game Information  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
1
Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS  
screen to activate the Instant Replay”  
mode.  
2
Touch keys for Instant Replay.  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
You can change the setting of the alert when  
the track is broadcast again. You can enable  
or disable alert for each song.  
Return to the start of the current  
song or program. Touching again  
will skip back to the previous song  
or program.  
[o]  
[o] and hold  
Fast reverses.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
Forwards play to the next song or  
program  
[p]  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
desired song.  
[p] and hold  
[f]  
Fast-forwards.  
Touching [f] switches between  
playback and pause.  
p During Instant Replaymode, each touch  
of [Disp] changes the display information  
as follows;  
Time position Channel number Chan-  
nel name Channel category Artist  
name/feature Song/program title —  
Composer  
3
Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.  
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the  
beginning of stored data.  
When the alert for the song is activated, [On]  
appears at the beginning of the selected title.  
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.  
Using the Functionmenu  
Changing the alert setting  
1
Touch [SIRIUS] on the AV Source”  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
menu to display the SIRIUSscreen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
28  
When you have already made 12 team se-  
lections, FULLis displayed and additional  
team selection is not possible. In this case,  
first delete the team selection and then try  
again.  
1
2
Touch [Memo Edit].  
Touch [Alert].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items. This function is useful when to want to  
turn the alert off temporarily without changing  
the setting of each selected team.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
song title that you want to delete.  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
3
Touch [Delete] when the song you  
Touch [Alert].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
want to delete is displayed.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
When a game involving one of your  
teams is broadcast  
4
Touch [Yes].  
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch the station, and you can view the game  
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel  
does not switch.  
p Alerts may not be provided depending on  
the status of the navigation system.  
Using the Game Alert function  
Selecting teams for Game Alert  
This navigation system can alert you when  
games involving your favorite sports teams are  
about to start. To use this function you need to  
store the teams you want to follow in advance.  
Displaying Game Information  
An alert will be displayed when a game with  
the team you selected is about to start (or is  
currently under way). You can also display  
game information and changes to the broad-  
cast channel.  
p The Game Information function is available  
when [Alert] is [On] in Game Alert.  
1
Touch [Game Info].  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
2
Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game  
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
score information which is registered.  
p The game score will be updated automati-  
cally.  
league.  
3
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel  
that broadcasts the displayed game.  
p If you have not made any team selections,  
Not Setis displayed.  
p When no games involving your favorite  
teams are currently being played  
NO GAMEis displayed.  
team.  
4
Touch [On/Off].  
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.  
p When the selected team is excluded from  
the alert target, the team is displayed as  
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
29  
Using AV input  
You can display video imageoutput by AV1  
Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi-  
gation system. For details of the connection  
method, refer to Installation Manual.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, video images cannot be  
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view  
video images, you must stop in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
1
Using AV1  
1 Hide the touch panel keys  
You can display video imageoutput by the  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel  
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to  
display the touch panel keys again.  
equipment connected to AV1 Input.  
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
2
Touch [AV1] on the AV Sourcemenu.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Using AV2  
You can display video imageoutput by the  
equipment connected to AV2 Input.  
1
Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2  
2
Touch [AV2] on the AV Sourcemenu.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
30  
The term external unitrefers to future  
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned  
for, or to devices that allow control of basic  
functions although they are not fully con-  
trolled by the navigation system. Two external  
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-  
tem. When two external units are connected,  
the navigation system allocates them as exter-  
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.  
1
2
3
4
5
For details of the connection method, refer to  
Installation Manual.  
1 Send a band command  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
external units operation manual. This section  
provides information on external unit opera-  
tions with the navigation system that differ  
from those described in the external units op-  
eration manual.  
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
Touch to send a band command to the ex-  
ternal unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the  
external unit may not respond.)  
2 Send an [a], [b], [c], or [d] command  
Touch to operate the external unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
Reading the screen  
3 Switching between automatic and man-  
ual function  
1
2
3
4
You can turn automatic and manual func-  
tion on or off.  
You can switch between Auto and Manual  
functions of the external unit connected.  
Initially, this function is set to Auto.  
p Operating commands set for Auto and  
Manual operations vary depending on  
the external unit connected.  
4 Send a 1 key to 6 key command  
The external unit can be operated by trans-  
mitting the operating commands set to 1  
key 6 key.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 External unit indicator  
Displays the information that is sent by con-  
nected external units.  
3 Auto/Manual mode indicator  
Shows the current mode.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
5 Use F1 F4 to operate the external unit  
The external unit can be operated by trans-  
mitting the operating commands set to F1  
F4.  
4 Current time  
p The operating commands set to F1 —  
F4 vary depending on the external unit.  
p Some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the AV  
Sourcemenu to select the external unit.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
31  
Other functions  
The Video imageand sound are output  
only when the appropriate setting on  
[AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] are  
[Video].  
Selecting the video for  
Rear display”  
You can choose either to show the same  
image as the front screen or to show the se-  
lected source on the Rear display.  
Operating the picture  
adjustment  
%
menu.  
Touch [Rear Screen] on the AV Source”  
Each touch of [Rear Screen] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake. Refer to  
Important Information for the user(a separate  
manual).  
!
Mirror AV The video on the front screen  
of the navigation unit is output to the Rear  
display”  
iPod The video and sound of the iPod  
are output to the Rear display”  
Disc The video and sound of the DVDs  
are output to the Rear display”  
AV1 The video and sound of AV1 are  
output to the Rear display”  
!
!
!
!
You can adjust the picture for each source and  
rear view camera.  
AV2 The video and sound of AV2 are  
output to the Rear display”  
1
Press and hold the MODE button.  
Press and hold to display the Picture Adjust-  
p When [Mirror AV] is selected, the following  
restrictions are applied to Rear display.  
When selecting [Rear View] in the map  
display, nothing is displayed.  
mentscreen.  
All sounds cannot be output for Rear  
display.  
When playing back video files on the ex-  
ternal storage device (USB, SD), the  
Video imageis not output.  
p When Disc is selected, the following restric-  
tions are applied to Rear display.  
When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is  
set in the built-in DVD drive, only the  
sounds is output.  
p When iPod is selected, the following restric-  
tions are applied to Rear display.  
The Video imageand sound are output  
only when the appropriate setting on  
[AV1 Input] is [iPod].  
!
!
!
!
Brightness Adjusts the black intensity  
Contrast Adjusts the contrast  
Color Adjusts the color saturation  
Color Temp. Adjusts the tone of color  
(red is emphasized or green is emphasized)  
Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of dis-  
play  
!
!
[Camera] Shows the picture adjustment  
display for the rear view camera  
p When AV is selected, the following restric-  
tions are applied to Rear display.  
The Video imageand sound are output  
only when AV1/AV2 has both video and  
sound.  
p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear  
view camera image returns you to the pre-  
vious screen.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
31  
p The adjustments of Brightness and  
Contrast are stored separately when your  
vehicles headlights are off (daytime) and  
when your vehicles headlights are on  
(nighttime). These are switched automati-  
cally depending on the vehicles headlights  
are on or off.  
p The adjustments of Dimmer is stored sepa-  
rately when your vehicles headlights are off  
(daytime) and when your vehicles head-  
lights are on (nighttime). Dimmer is  
switched automatically only when the value  
of nighttime is lower than the value of day-  
time.  
p You cannot adjust Color for the source  
without a video and navigation map display.  
p The setting contents can be memorized se-  
parately for the following screen and the  
Video image.  
AM/FM/CD/ROM/iPod(Music)/SD  
(audio)/USB(audio)/Bluetooth Audio/  
XM/SIRIUS/Digital Radio screen  
AV1 and iPod(Video)  
DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX  
SD(Video) and USB(Video)  
AV2 and EXT1, EXT2  
Rear view camera image  
Map screen  
p The picture adjustment may not be avail-  
able with some rear view cameras.  
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,  
you may not be able to adjust the screen at  
low temperatures.  
2
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the desired  
item.  
Each time you touch [+] or [] increases or de-  
creases the level of the desired item.  
3
Touch  
to return to the previous  
screen.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
Setting video input 2 (AV2)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to RCA inputs  
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the  
back of the system.  
Options on the AV System  
Settingsmenu  
Displaying the AV System  
Settingsmenu  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
%
Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
3
Touch [AV Settings].  
The AV System Settingsmenu appears.  
!
!
Off No video component is connected  
EXT Pioneer external unit connected  
with the RCA video cable  
!
Video External video component  
Switching the auto antenna  
setting  
If the blue lead of the navigation system is  
connected to the antenna control terminal of  
the vehicle, select either of the following set-  
tings.  
p You can only adjust [Wide Mode] when se-  
lecting an AV source with video.  
p You can only adjust [Rear SP] when the AV  
source is Off.  
!
Power The antenna extends or turns on  
when the ignition switch is turned on. The  
antenna is stored or turned off when the  
ignition switch is turned off.  
Setting video input 1 (AV1)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to mini-jack input.  
!
Radio The antenna extends or turns on  
only when the audio source is FM or AM.  
The antenna is stored or turned off when  
the AV source is switched to another  
source.  
%
Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
%
Touch [ANT CTRL] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Touching [ANT CTRL] switches between  
[Radio] and [Power].  
!
iPod iPod connected with the USB Inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)  
!
!
Video External video component  
Off No video component is connected  
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]  
is selected, turning off the ignition switch  
will cause the antenna to automatically re-  
tract or turn off.  
p Use AV1 Input when connecting CD-RM10  
(sold separately) through the external video  
component.  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
Changing the wide screen mode  
Setting the rear output  
The navigation systems rear output can be  
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer  
connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub. W,  
you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to  
a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.  
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear  
full-range speaker connection (Full).  
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA  
rear output are switched simultaneously in  
this setting. (When you use the product  
without RCA rear output, this setting only  
applies to the rear speaker leads.)  
%
Touch [Wide Mode] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
!
Full (full)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal  
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3  
TV picture (normal picture) without any  
omissions.  
!
Cinema (cinema)  
p Rear SP can be set only when the source is  
[Off].  
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-  
tion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direc-  
tion and by an intermediate proportion  
between Full and Zoom in the vertical di-  
rection; ideal for a cinema-sized picture  
(wide screen picture) where captions lie  
outside the frame.  
1
Touch [Rear SP] on the AV System Set-  
tingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
!
!
Zoom (zoom)  
2
Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-  
portion both vertically and horizontally;  
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide  
screen picture).  
put setting.  
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Full.  
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Sub. W.  
Normal (normal)  
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving  
you no sense of disparity since its propor-  
tions are the same as that of the normal  
picture.  
Switching the muting/  
attenuation timing  
p Different settings can be stored for each  
video source.  
p The same setting is automatically applied  
for the following grouping.  
You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-  
ate the output signal. This setting is invalid for  
the mute signal has been received from the  
MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.  
(Even if this setting is [Off], the navigation sys-  
tem will mute or attenuate the audio source  
volume when the signal is output via MUTE  
lead.)  
!
!
!
!
DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX  
EXT1 and EXT2  
AV1 and AV2  
iPod  
p When video is viewed in a wide screen  
mode that does not match its original as-  
pect ratio, it may look strange.  
%
Touch [Mute] on the AV System Set-  
tingsmenu.  
Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as  
follows:  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the authors  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always viewed at Full.  
!
Guide/Tel/VR The volume is muted or at-  
tenuated according to the following condi-  
tions  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
When the navigation outputs the gui-  
dance voice.  
When you use a cellular phone via Blue-  
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-  
coming call).  
Changing the voice output of  
the navigation guidance  
You can set the speaker to output the naviga-  
tion guidance and phone voice, etc.  
When the voice recognition mode is ac-  
tivated.  
%
Touch [Guidance/Tel SP] on the AV Sys-  
tem Settingsmenu.  
Each touch of [Guidance/Tel SP] changes the  
settings as follows:  
!
!
Tel/VR The volume is muted or attenu-  
ated according to the following conditions  
When you use a cellular phone via Blue-  
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-  
coming call).  
When the voice recognition mode is ac-  
tivated.  
Off The volume does not change  
!
L+R SP Uses both the front right and left  
speakers  
Left SP Uses only the front left speaker  
Right SP Uses only the front right speak-  
!
!
er  
p Operation returns to normal when the cor-  
respond action is ended.  
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod  
music information  
Switching the muting/  
attenuation level  
You can select the muting/attenuation level of  
[Mute]. This setting is also effective for a mute  
signal that has been received from the MUTE  
lead connected to the navigation unit.  
p This menu is not available when AV source  
is [Off].  
If you always set the language other than Eng-  
lishon Voice Language, this setting is un-  
necessary.  
Unless [VR Catalog Mode] is turned off, this  
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-  
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-  
mands. It may take a short period of time to  
transfer the information. Change the setting  
according to your usage.  
%
Touch [Mute Level] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-  
ging music information (1) when the iPod is  
connected or when the system boots up while  
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the  
selected and displayed AV Source, unless [VR  
Catalog Mode] is turned off.  
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
20dB The volume becomes 1/10  
10dB The volume becomes 1/3  
All The volume becomes 0  
p When you select [All], no audio adjust-  
ments are possible during the sound is  
turned off.  
p This function is available when [Change  
Control Mode] is set to [Navi].  
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-  
necessary.  
p During transfer, iPod operations (such as  
[Shuffle], [MENU], or [Video]) are not  
available.  
p When you select [20dB] or [10dB], no audio  
adjustments are possible during the sound  
is attenuated.  
p Operation returns to normal when the cor-  
respond action is ended.  
p Even when a mute signal has been received  
from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-  
tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot  
be attenuated or muted.  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
p Once the cataloging is completed, you can  
deactivate [VR Catalog Menu] until you  
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-  
date the iPod data, activate [VR Catalog  
Menu] again to transfer the music informa-  
tion and synchronize the music information  
for voice commands with the data on iPod.  
p After you select Offin [VR Catalog  
Mode], the system doesnt catalog the  
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-  
viously cataloged data are available as  
voice commands.  
p Once you start the cataloging process, only  
a few basic voice commands can be used  
for iPod until the process has completely  
finished.  
p If unreadable characters are included in  
the data on your iPod, names or types may  
not be available as voice commands.  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate VR Catalog Mode.  
Touch [Cancel].  
#
Stops the cataloging of iPod.  
If you want to restart the cataloging of iPod,  
touch [Restart].  
Displaying your DivX VOD  
registration code  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this navigation system, you first  
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit  
to your provider.  
p This feature is available when the selected  
source is CD, ROM, DivX, DVD-V or  
DVD-VR.  
Important Notice regarding Voice  
Control for iPods  
%
Touch [DivX VOD] on the AV System  
Settingsmenu.  
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-  
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-  
loging of iPod content only occurs when the  
system is in AV Sourcemode and the iPod”  
is the selected and displayed AV Source”  
screen. Cataloging of iPod content will not  
occur if the system is off, if any other AV  
Sourceis selected (aside from iPod), or if the  
system is in any other mode (aside from AV  
Sourcemode) such as Destination Menu,  
Settings Menu, Phone Menuor the map  
screen. If you wish to use Voice Control for all  
iPod content, it is recommended that you first  
connect your iPod, select iPodas the AV  
source, and keep the iPod screen displayed  
until cataloging is completed cataloging of  
iPod content should only take a few minutes,  
and will depend on the size of the content  
stored on your iPod. A message will be dis-  
played when cataloging is completed.  
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you register with a DivX VOD  
provider.  
The AV Sound Settings”  
menu options  
Displaying the AV Sound  
Settingsmenu  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
3
Touch [AV Sound].  
The AV Sound Settingsscreen appears.  
1
Touch [VR Catalog Menu] on the AV  
System Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV Sys-  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
p You cannot make adjustments in the follow-  
ing situations:  
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/  
right speaker balance moves from left to right.  
AV source is [Off]  
During muting/attenuation  
p You cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner  
is selected as the AV source.  
Using the equalizer  
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to  
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics  
as desired.  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that  
provides an ideal listening environment in all  
occupied seats.  
Recalling equalizer curves  
There are seven stored equalizer curves that  
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list  
of the equalizer curves:  
1
Touch [FAD/BAL] on the AV Sound Set-  
tingsmenu.  
Equalizer curve  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
When [Sub. W] is selected in [Rear SP],  
[Balance] will be displayed instead of  
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance  
cannot be adjusted.  
Super Bass  
Super Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched  
sound is boosted.  
Powerful  
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are boosted.  
Natural  
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.  
2
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear  
speaker balance.  
Vocal  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear  
speaker balance moves towards the front or  
the rear.  
Front:15to Rear:15is displayed as the  
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to  
rear.  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the  
human vocal range, is boosted.  
Flat  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
Custom1  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each  
source.  
Setting Front:and Rear:to 0is correct  
when using a two speaker system.  
Custom2  
3
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all  
AV source.  
speaker balance.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right  
speaker balance moves towards the left or the  
right.  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
1
Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings”  
The difference between Custom1and  
menu.  
Custom2”  
!
A separate Custom1 curve can be created  
for each source. If you make adjustments  
when a curve Super Bass, Powerful,  
Natural, Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is se-  
lected, the equalizer curve settings will be  
memorized in Custom1.  
!
!
A Custom2 curve can be created common  
to all sources. If you make adjustments  
when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-  
tom2 curve will be updated.  
The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized  
for each of the source selected, but one  
curve is shared for the following sources.  
CD, ROM, DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX  
AM and FM  
EXT1 and EXT2  
AV1 and AV2  
SD and USB  
XM and SIRIUS  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
Touch the equalizer you want.  
Adjusting the preset equalizer curve  
effect  
You can adjust the effect of the preset equali-  
zer curves.  
The following equalizer curves can be ad-  
justed:  
!
!
The different source volume level can be  
set between iPod and USB.  
!
!
!
!
Super Bass  
Powerful  
Natural  
Vocal  
When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.  
1
Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
1
Touch [EQ] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
3
Touch the equalizer you want.  
2
Touch the one of keys to select a curve  
that you want to use as the basis of custo-  
mizing.  
Touch [+] or [] next to Nuance.  
p The level can be adjusted in the range of 6  
to +6.  
p If [Natural] is selected, the level can be ad-  
justed in the range of 4 to +6.  
3
4
Touch [Customize].  
Touch the frequency that you want to  
adjust the level.  
Adjusting the equalizer curves  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be  
made with a 7-band graphic equalizer.  
5
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust the level of  
the equalizer band.  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the level of  
the equalization band increases or decreases.  
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
32  
Customizing preferences  
Adjusting loudness  
5
Touch [c] or [d] next to  
Frequency(Hz)to select cut-off fre-  
quency.  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], cut-off fre-  
quencies are selected in the following order:  
50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz  
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-  
lected range are output from the subwoofer.  
1
Touch [Loudness] on the AV Sound  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
Touch [Loudness] to select the level you  
want.  
Using the high pass filter  
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is  
selected in the following order:  
Off Low Mid High  
When you do not want low sounds from the  
subwoofer output frequency range to play  
from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF  
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than  
those in the selected range are output from  
the front or rear speakers.  
Using subwoofer output  
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output mechanism, which can be  
turned on or off.  
p Only when Sub Wooferis [On], you can  
adjust Phase, Leveland  
1
Touch [HPF] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
Frequency(Hz).  
2
Touch [HPF] to select cut-off frequency.  
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
Off 50 Hz 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz —  
125 Hz  
1
Touch [Sub Woofer] on the AV Sound  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
2
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output  
on.  
Adjusting source levels  
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].  
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust  
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-  
dical changes in volume when switching be-  
tween sources.  
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
level, which remains unchanged.  
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level  
with the level of the source you wish to ad-  
just.  
3
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select  
2
Touch [SLA] on the AV Sound Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
the phase of subwoofer output.  
4
Touch [+] or [] next to Levelto adjust  
the output level.  
+6 to 24 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
166  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
32  
3
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the source vo-  
2
Touch desired stage setting.  
lume.  
+8dB to 8dB is displayed as the source vo-  
lume is increased or decreased.  
The following AV sources are set to the same  
source level adjustment volume automatically.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
DVD-V and DVD-VR  
CD, ROM, DivX  
EXT1 and EXT2  
AV1 and AV2  
SD and USB  
XM and SIRIUS  
p [Living Room] setting that emphasizes  
mid-range sound hardly has any effect near  
the maximum volume level.  
p When you set staging to an option other  
than [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) setting  
turns [Off].  
p The different source volume level can be set  
between iPod and USB.  
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)  
The Bass Boosterenhances bass sounds,  
which can be muted by driving noise.  
= For details, refer to Using the high pass filter  
1
Touch [Bass Booster] on the AV Sound  
Adjusting a position effect  
You can select a listener position that you  
want to make as the center of sound effects.  
Settingsmenu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the AV  
1
Touch [Staging] on the AV Sound Set-  
2
Touch [+] or [] to adjust the range from  
tingsmenu.  
0 to 6.  
2
3
Touch [Position].  
Touch desired position.  
Setting the simulated sound stage  
You can select the desired effect from various  
simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio  
or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-  
tener positioning effect.  
Setting a stage that fits your image  
1
Touch [Staging] on the AV Sound Set-  
tingsmenu.  
167  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
33  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
p The voice operation may not be operable for a  
To Ensure Safe Driving  
minute after the navigation system has booted  
up.  
p Voice operation will be activated 30 seconds  
after the map screen is displayed.  
If the VOICE button does not respond, display  
the disclaimer screen and then touch [OK].  
The map screen is displayed.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the  
voice operation as much as possible while  
driving.  
If you use voice operation, select [English] in  
[Voice Language] of Language. If you select  
other languages, voice operation will not be  
available.  
Starting voice operation  
%
Press the VOICE button when the map  
screen or the AV operation screen is dis-  
played.  
The voice operation screen appears.  
Basics of Voice Operation  
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest  
in voice recognition technology. You can use  
voice commands to operate many of its func-  
tions. This chapter describes where you can  
use voice commands, and also what com-  
mands the system accepts.  
1
2
p This function is not available while the cata-  
loging of iPod is created.  
1
2
:
Flow of voice operation  
You can listen to the brief operating in-  
struction.  
You can start voice operation any time even  
when the map screen is displayed or audio is  
operating. (Some operations are not available.)  
The basic steps of voice operations are as  
follows.  
:
cancels voice operation.  
You can cancel the voice operation feature  
at any time by saying Cancel. After you  
cancel voice operations, the display returns  
to the screen displayed before the voice op-  
eration screen appeared.  
1
Switch the screen to map screen or AV  
operation screen.  
2
Press the VOICE button to activate  
voice operations.  
How to use the voice operation  
Searching for a location by address  
In this example, you want to search for a loca-  
tion by address and set it as your destination.  
3
Speak a command into the microphone  
after the beep.  
4
When the command is recognized, the  
navigation system displays next options on  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
the screen, and pronounces it in some case-  
s.  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
2
Press the VOICE button to activate  
5
Repeat previous step as necessary.  
voice operations.  
6
out.  
The requested operation will be carried  
A list of commands for voice operation ap-  
pears. After the message, the beep indicates  
that the system is ready to accept your voice  
command. Say a command after this beep.  
168  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
33  
3
Say I need directions.  
Calling the entry on Contacts”  
A message prompting you to select a search  
by address or by POI appears.  
A method for dialing the entry named Nancy”  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
4
Say Find an address.  
A message to prompt the next operation is  
given.  
1
Press the VOICE button to activate  
voice operations.  
5
Say a command according the message  
2
Say Call Nancyto make a call.  
displayed on the screen.  
The message confirming whether to dial ap-  
pears.  
p When the list of candidates with number  
appears, say the number that you want to  
select.  
3
Say Yes.  
Dialing starts.  
When you select the entry next to 1, say  
Number One.  
p If there are multiple items that correspond  
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-  
pears. In this case, touch the item you want  
to select from the list.  
Operating iPod by voice  
You can play music using voice operation from  
the iPod connected to the navigation system.  
p To use the content/data on the iPod for  
voice operation, transfer the data to this  
system first.  
Search for POI in vicinity  
= For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging  
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are  
shown below. (A method for playing the album  
title named Pioneeris described here, along  
with an operational example.)  
In this example, you want to search for a POI  
and set it as your destination.  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
2
Press the VOICE button to activate  
voice operations.  
1
Press the VOICE button to activate  
A list of commands for voice operation ap-  
pears. After the message, the beep indicates  
that the system is ready to accept your voice  
command. Say a command after this beep.  
voice operations.  
2
Say Change Sourceto display the AV  
source selection screen.  
3
Say iPodon the selection screen to  
3
Say I need directions.  
switch the AV source to iPod.  
A message prompting you to select a search  
by address or by POI appears.  
p Touching the item on the screen also en-  
ables you to select the desired AV source.  
4
Say Point of interest.  
4
Press the VOICE button to activate  
A message to prompt the next operation is  
given.  
voice operations.  
5
Say Play the album Pioneerto play-  
5
Say a command according the message  
back the album name Pioneer.  
displayed on the screen.  
If the command is recognized properly, play-  
back starts from the first song of Pioneer.  
p When the list of candidates with number  
appears, say the number that you want to  
select.  
When you select the entry next to 1, say  
Number One.  
p If there are multiple items that correspond  
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-  
pears. In this case, touch the item you want  
to select from the list.  
169  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
33  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Available Basic Voice Commands  
The navigation system can also recognize the  
words in the following list.  
Basic commands  
Voice commands and operations  
Back d Returns the previous screen.  
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.  
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.  
Next page, Previous page d Switch the page.  
Last page, First page d Switch to the last or first page.  
Voice operation for the iPod  
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Play-  
list name>, <Genre name> shown on the fol-  
lowing chart, say the name their name in the  
iPod.  
p Playback of iPod movies is not available  
using voice commands.  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Resume d Resumes the song or the video currently playing .  
Pause d Pauses the song or the video currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
Play songs d Start playback from the top of Songs.  
Play artists d Displays the artist list d Say the artist name that you want to play.  
Play the artist <Artist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected artist.  
Play albums d Displays the album list d Say the album name that you want to play.  
Play the album <Album name> d Start playback from the top of the selected album.  
Play playlists d Displays the playlist d Say the playlist that you want to play.  
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected playlist.  
Play genres d Displays the genre list d Say the genre that you want to play.  
Play the genre <Genre name> d Start playback from the top of the selected genre.  
Browse artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
Browse albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the de-  
sired voice commands.  
Browse the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
170  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
33  
Browse playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to  
continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
Browse genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
Play more music artist d Plays the songs related to the currently playing artist.  
Play more music album d Plays the songs related to the currently playing album.  
Play more music genre d Plays the songs related to the currently playing genre.  
Next page, Previous page d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (Note 1)  
First page, Last page d Displays the first or last page of the selection list. (Note 1)  
(Note 1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed.  
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)  
AV source selection  
Voice commands and operations  
Change Source to DISC d Switch the AV source to Disc.  
Change Source to FM d Switch the AV source to FM.  
Change Source to AM d Switch the AV source to AM.  
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to XM.  
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to SIRIUS.  
Change Source to HD Radio d Switch the AV source to Digital Radio.  
Change Source to SD Media d Switch the AV source to SD.  
Change Source to USB d Switch the AV source to USB.  
Change Source to iPod d Switch the AV source to iPod.  
Change Source to Bluetooth Audio d Switch the AV source to Bluetooth Audio.  
Built-in DVD drive, external storage device (USB, SD)  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause d Pauses the track or file currently playing .  
Resume d Resumes the track or file currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next track or file.  
Previous song d Plays the previous track or file, or return to the beginning of the track or file currently playing.  
171  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
33  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning  
p You can make a phone call by voice dialing  
if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology is being paired with  
the navigation system.  
p For <entrys name> shown on the follow-  
ing chart, say the name of the entry stored  
in Contacts.  
p For <phone number> shown on the follow-  
ing chart, say the desired phone number.  
Voice commands and operations  
Call <entrys name> d Make a call to the entry (Note 2).  
Call <entrys name> general d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the general  
phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entrys name> mobile d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the cellular  
phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entrys name> home d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the home phone  
number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entrys name> work d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the office phone  
number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entrys name> other d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the other phone  
number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <phone number> d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dial the phone number.  
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say  
Yes d The system starts dialing to the number.  
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on Contactsyou want to call d Displays the message confirming  
whether to dial d Say Yes d The system starts dialing to the number (Note 2).  
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialed Calls) to select the number and call (Note 4).  
List recent calls d Incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the num-  
ber and call (Note 4).  
List recent calls d Outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialed Calls) to select the number  
and call (Note 4).  
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the number and  
call (Note 4).  
(Note 2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone  
number.  
(Note 3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry.  
In such case, say the type of phone number.  
(Note 4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.  
172  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Tips for Voice Operation  
33  
For your voice commands to be correctly re-  
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-  
tions are suitable for recognition.  
Close the vehicle windows  
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-  
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the  
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.  
Position the microphone carefully  
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should  
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front  
of the driver.  
Pause before giving a command  
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition  
to fail.  
Pronounce your commands carefully  
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.  
173  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
34  
Other functions  
Entering the password  
Setting the anti-theft function  
On the password input screen, you must enter  
the current password. If you enter an incorrect  
password three times, the screen is locked  
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-  
abled.  
You can set a password for the navigation sys-  
tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-  
word is set, the navigation system prompts for  
the password at the time of next boot up.  
1
Enter the password.  
Setting the password  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
2
Touch [OK].  
Top Menu.  
The message The unit has been locked be-  
cause an invalid password was entered  
three times. Turn ACC off and on, and  
enter your password.appears if you entered  
the correct password and the navigation sys-  
tem is unlocking.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The Settings Menuscreen appears.  
3
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Area1  
Area2  
Area3  
Deleting the password  
The current password can be deleted.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Top Menu.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the Top Menu.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
4
Touch [Set Password].  
4
Touch [Clear password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
The password setting screen appears.  
5
Enter the password you want to set.  
p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a  
password.  
5
6
7
Enter the current password.  
Touch [OK].  
6
7
Touch [OK].  
Touch [Yes].  
The message for deletion appears and then  
the current password is deleted.  
Reenter the password to confirm the  
setting.  
8
Touch [OK].  
Forgotten passwords  
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-  
vice Station.  
Password protection is applied.  
p If you want to change the password cur-  
rently set, enter the current password and  
then enter the new one.  
174  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
34  
Restoring the default setting  
Resets various settings registered to the navi-  
gation system and restores them to the default  
or factory settings.  
Returning the navigation  
system to the default or  
factory settings  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings. There are four  
methods to clear user data, and the situations  
and the cleared content are different for each  
method. For information regarding the content  
that is cleared by each method, see the list  
presented later.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
1
Display the System Settingsscreen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the System  
2
Touch [Restore Factory Settings].  
Method 1: The battery of the vehicle is  
removed or the yellow lead of the  
navigation system is disconnected.  
Clears almost all settings of the AV function.  
The message confirming whether to restore  
the settings appears.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory  
Settings].  
This clears some items in the Navi Settings”  
menu, the System Settingsmenu and the  
Bluetooth Settingsmenu.  
Returning the navigation  
system to the initial state  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be de-  
Method 3: Touch [Clear user information]  
on the Select Items to Resetscreen.  
Clears almost all settings and user data of the  
navigation function and the phone function.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be de-  
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and  
turn off the engine. Turn the ignition key  
back to Acc off. Then start the engine  
again, and turn the power to the naviga-  
tion system back on.  
Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the Select  
Items to Resetscreen.  
The splash screen appears.  
Clears almost all settings and user data of the  
navigation function and the phone function.  
= For details, refer to Setting items to be de-  
2
Press and hold the MODE button and  
the TRK (c) button while splash screen ap-  
pears.  
The Select Items to Resetscreen appears.  
3
Touch [Clear user information].  
The message confirming whether to erase all  
user data appears.  
And then touch [Yes] to erase all user data.  
#
Touch [Reset].  
Various settings registered to the navigation sys-  
tem is reset to the default or factory settings.  
4
Touch [Yes].  
The recorded contents are cleared.  
175  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
34  
Other functions  
Setting items to be deleted  
The items to be deleted vary depending on the  
reset method. The items listed in the following  
table return to the default or factory settings.  
p Almost all items not listed below will be re-  
tained. However, some of the items to be re-  
turned to their default values are not listed  
if the setting value can be easily recovered  
by user, such as the last map scale, the last  
status of AV operation screen, etc.  
: The setting will be retained.  
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to  
the default or factory settings.  
Navigation functions  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
View mode and scale setting on  
the map  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Map function  
Direction of the map  
Last cursor position on the map  
screen  
1
Current route  
Guidance state of the current  
route  
Route Setting  
Vehicle position information  
Route conditions  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Point registered in [Favorites]  
[History]  
1
[Destination]  
All settings on MSN Direct”  
[View Mode]  
1
Map Settings  
menu  
Other settings  
[3D Calibration Status]  
[Set Home]  
1
[Navi Settings]  
[Modify Current Location]  
Other settings  
[Program Language], [Voice  
Language]  
1
1
[Time]  
1
1
1
1
1
1
[System Settings]  
[Back Camera]  
Other settings  
176  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
34  
[Phone Menu]  
All settings  
menu  
1
1
1
Other functions  
Anti-theft password  
AV functions  
Volume  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
1
1
1
[AV Settings]  
[AV Sound]  
All settings  
All settings  
Function of each  
source  
All settings  
1
[Picture Adjustment]  
1
1
Other functions  
Tilt  
177  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common  
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem  
cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems with the navigation screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
The power doesnt turn on. The Leads and connectors are incor-  
navigation system doesnt oper- rectly connected.  
Confirm once more that all connections are  
correct.  
ate.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then  
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-  
rect fuse with the same rating.  
Noise and other factors are causing Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the built-in microprocessor to oper- the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
ate incorrectly.  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-  
on the map without a significant satellites is poor, causing reduced  
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-  
positioning error.  
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves. Keep  
signal quality may occur for the fol- the antenna clear.  
lowing reasons:  
The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-  
ble location.  
Obstacles are blocking signals  
from the satellites.  
The position of satellites relative  
to your vehicle is inadequate.  
Signals from the GPS satellites  
have been modified to reduce accu-  
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by  
the US Department of Defense, and  
the US government reserves the  
right to distort positioning data for  
military reasons. This may lead to  
greater positioning errors.)  
If a vehicle phone or cellular  
phone is used near the GPS anten-  
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-  
porarily.  
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals.  
Signals from the vehicles speed  
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed  
erly. the system.  
Check that the cables are properly connected.  
178  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is securely  
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer  
that installed the system.  
You cannot position your vehicle  
on the map without a significant  
positioning error.  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding  
the installation angle limitations.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to  
Installation Manual.)  
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal  
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The  
reversing.  
navigation system works properly without the  
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will  
be adversely affected.)  
The map color does not switch [Day/Night Display] is set to [Day]. Check [Day/Night Display] setting and make  
automatically between daytime  
and nighttime.  
sure [Automatic] is selected. (Page 46)  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
nected.  
Check the connection.  
The screen is too bright.  
The display is very dim.  
An improper value has been set on Check the settings. (Page 158)  
Brightness.  
The vehicles light is turned ON, and Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,  
[Automatic] is selected on [Day/  
if desired, select [Day]. (Page 46)  
Night Display].  
An improper value has been set on Check the settings. (Page 158)  
Brightness.  
No sounds of AV source are pro- The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
duced.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The volume level will not rise.  
A speaker lead is disconnected.  
The volume of navigation gui-  
Try to adjust them with VOL (+/)  
Turn the volume up or down using [Volume]  
dance and beeps cannot be ad- button.  
justed.  
on the System Settingsmenu. (Page 98)  
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the  
Use the following methods to reduce the  
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:  
conversation due to an echo.  
from the speakers and then picked Lower the volume on the receiver  
up by the microphone again, creat- Have both parties pause slightly before  
ing an echo.  
speaking  
Theres no picture.  
The parking brake cord is not con-  
nected.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The parking brake is not applied.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The backlight of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Turn on the backlight. (Page 102)  
Rear displaypicture disap-  
The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.  
pears.  
the navigation system has been  
ejected.  
This problem may occur when certain con-  
nection methods are used.  
There is a problem with the Rear  
display, for example a faulty wiring  
connection.  
Check the Rear displayand its connection.  
An AV source that cannot output to Select an appropriate AV source.  
the rear display is selected.  
179  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear  
is incorrect.  
view camera.  
Nothing is displayed and the  
touch panel keys cannot be  
used.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
when the rear view camera was not Camera]. (Page 99)  
Select the correct polarity setting for [Back  
connected.  
There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from  
touch panel key are touched, or the actual positions that respond to  
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 100)  
a different key responds.  
your touch for some reason.  
The external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be used.  
The USB storage device has been  
removed immediately after plugging the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
it.  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
Problems in the AV screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean the disc.  
sible.  
The disc is dirty.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.  
maged.  
The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format.  
file format.  
The disc format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace the disc.  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is. (For more cau-  
cannot play.  
tions about handling each type of media,  
refer to Page 192.)  
The screen is covered by a cau- The parking brake lead is not con-  
tion message and the video can- nected or applied.  
not be shown.  
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and  
apply the parking brake.  
The parking brake interlock is acti- Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
vated.  
the parking brake.  
No video output from connected [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] setting Correct the settings. (Page 160)  
equipments.  
is incorrect.  
No video output from connected  
iPod.  
The connection of the USB interface Connect both the USB plug and the RCA  
cable for iPod is incorrect.  
cable side. (If only one of these connection  
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-  
The audio or video skips.  
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.  
secured.  
No sounds are produced.  
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or  
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.  
with DVD-Video.  
The system is paused or performing, For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),  
fast reverse or forward during the  
disc playback.  
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.  
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible  
This operation is not possible. (For example,  
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,  
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)  
eration is not possible.  
with the video configuration.  
180  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The reading of data is impossible  
during disc playback.  
After touching g once, start playback once  
more.  
The picture stops (pauses) and  
the navigation system cannot be  
operated.  
The picture is stretched, with in- The aspect setting is incorrect for  
correct aspect ratio. the display.  
Select the appropriate setting for that image.  
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.  
played and DVD playback is not  
possible.  
Turn parental lock off or change the level.  
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.  
cannot be canceled.  
Input the correct code number. (Page 129)  
Playback is not with the audio  
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language  
settings selected in [DVD/  
The DVD playing does not feature  
Switching to a selected language is not possi-  
ble if the language selected in [DVD/DivX®  
Setup] is not recorded on the disc. (Page 128)  
selected in [DVD/DivX® Setup].  
DivX® Setup].  
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible  
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have  
with the copy guard analogue copy protect  
system, the picture may suffer from horizon-  
tal stripes or other imperfections when a disc  
with that kind of protection signal is viewed  
on some displays. This does not mean the na-  
vigation system is malfunctioning.  
back.  
this.)  
iPod cannot be operated.  
The iPod is frozen.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
An error has occurred.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn  
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to  
Acc off. Then start the engine again, and  
turn the power to the navigation system back  
on.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
Problems with the phone screen  
Symptom Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser-  
the touch panel keys for dialing vice.  
are inactive.  
Retry after re-entering the range for service.  
The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process.  
phone and the navigation system  
cannot be established now.  
If the screen becomes frozen...  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
181  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages and how to react to them  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to  
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.  
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a  
case, follow the instructions given on the display.  
Messages and how to react to them  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Route calculation was not  
possible.  
Route calculation has failed be-  
cause of a malfunction in map data, ! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
! Change the destination.  
software, or hardware.  
sage persists.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble. Destination too far.  
The destination is too far.  
Set a destination closer to the starting point.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble. Destination too close.  
The destination is too close.  
Set a destination farther from the starting  
point.  
Route calculation not possi-  
The destination, waypoint(s), or  
! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.  
ble. Navigation cannot be pro- starting point are in an area where ! Reset the destination after you drive the ve-  
vided around destination or  
starting point.  
no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.  
the route calculation is impossible.  
Route to destination cannot  
be calculated.  
The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.  
an isolated island, etc. without a  
ferry and the route calculation is im-  
possible. If there is no road con-  
nected to your starting point or  
destination, this message will ap-  
pear.  
Failed to create route profile In rare cases, a route calculation  
! Retry.  
error may occur.  
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
sage persists.  
No picture folder. Save jpeg  
file to /Pictures/ folder  
Cannot load the image because  
Picturesfolder is not found in the (Page 99)  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
inserted external storage device.  
Picturesfolder exists on the SD  
memory card but there is no load-  
able data in the folder.  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
Data Read error.  
The file is corrupt  
Failed to read the data for some rea- Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
The data is damaged or an attempt Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
was made to set an image file that (Page 99)  
was not made to specifications as  
the splash screen.  
182  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
The cellular phones Bluetooth wire- Activate the target phones Bluetooth wire-  
less technology is turned off.  
less technology.  
Connection failed.  
The cellular phone is paired (con-  
nected) with another device.  
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.  
Rejection has been received from  
the cellular phone.  
Operate the target phone and accept the con-  
nection request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
The target cellular phone cannot be Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
found.  
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
lar phone is not too far.  
Could not find any available  
phone.  
No available phone exists in the sur- ! Activate the target phones Bluetooth wire-  
roundings when the system  
less technology.  
searches for connectable cellular  
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
technology. lar phone is not too far.  
Registration failed.  
The cellular phones Bluetooth wire- Keep turning the target phones Bluetooth  
less technology is turned off during wireless technology on during the registra-  
the registration step.  
tion.  
Rejection by the cellular phone has Operate the target phone and accept the re-  
received.  
gistration request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
Registration step has failed for  
some reason.  
Retry the registration and if the registration  
still fails, try registering using your cellular  
phone.  
183  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages for audio functions  
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer  
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error  
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.  
The messages in ( )will appear on the Rear display.  
Built-in DVD drive  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Reading error  
Dirty  
Clean the disc.  
(ERROR-02-XX)  
Scratched disc  
Replace the disc.  
The disc is loaded upside down  
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.  
Playback error. Please remove Electrical or mechanical  
! Replace the disc.  
the disc.  
! Set the ACC to Off and then set it to On  
again.  
Region code cannot be  
The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the  
matched (DIFFERENT REGION gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.  
DISC)  
tem.  
Unreadable disc  
This type of disc cannot be played  
by the navigation system  
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-  
tem can play. (Page 209)  
Playback error due to irregu- The temperature of the navigation  
Wait until the units temperature returns to  
lar temperature. Please re-  
move the disc. (THERMAL  
PROTECTION IN MOTION)  
system is outside of the normal op- within normal operating limits.  
erating range.  
ERROR-FF-FF  
Undefined error  
Set the ACC to Off and then set it to On  
again.  
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital  
The protected files are skipped.  
back will be skipped (FILE  
rights management.  
SKIPPED)  
Cannot play back all tracks  
(PROCETED DISC)  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the disc.  
secured by DRM.  
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-  
! Retry.  
to write on the flash. (CAN  
tents cannot be saved for some rea- ! If the message appears frequently, consult  
NOT SAVE DATA)  
son.  
your dealer.  
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-  
IZATION ERROR)  
Check whether this device has been regis-  
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.  
der. VOD content cannot be played  
back.  
Cannot play back HD file (FILE High definition (HD) DivX video can- Create playable one and retry.  
NOT PLAYABLE-HIGH DEF)  
not play.  
SD/USB/iPod  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital  
The protected files are skipped.  
back will be skipped  
rights management.  
This type of file cannot be played by Replace it with the playable file. (Page 195)  
this unit.  
184  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
All the files on the inserted external Store playable files.  
storage device are secured by DRM.  
Cannot play back all tracks  
All of the files cannot be played by  
this unit.  
Replace it with the playable file. (Page 195)  
USB flash drive was discon-  
The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB  
nected for device protection. short-circuited.  
Do not connect this USB flash  
cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
drive to the unit. To restart  
USB, restart the unit.  
The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do  
consumes more than 500 mA (maxi- not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,  
mum allowable current).  
then to ACC or ON and then connect the  
compliant USB storage device.  
The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or  
short-circuited.  
USB cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
Authorization failure. iPod is The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod of a compatible version.  
not connected.  
navigation system.  
Communication failure  
! Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod  
main menu is displayed, connect the cable  
again.  
! If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
iPod VR Dictionary being cre- iPod function is restricted because Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until  
ated. Please wait.  
the navigation system is trying to  
acquire the information needed to  
iPod VR Dictionary updatedappears.  
Switch the screen to another screen to can-  
operate iPod with voice commands cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the  
from the iPod currently connected. acquiring process will resume when the iPod  
basic screen (Music) is displayed.) (Page 162)  
Creating iPod VR dictionary.  
Voice operation is restricted be-  
Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until  
Some iPod commands are un- cause the navigation system is try- iPod VR Dictionary updatedappears.  
available during this process. ing to acquire the information  
Switch the screen to another screen to can-  
needed to operate iPod with voice  
cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the  
commands from the iPod currently acquiring process will resume when the iPod  
connected.  
basic screen (Music) is displayed.) (Page 162)  
185  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without  
fail to get the accuracy of positioning.  
p The position of the speed detection circuit  
vary depending on the vehicle model. For  
details, consult your authorized Pioneer  
dealer or an installation professional.  
p Some types of vehicles may not output a  
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-  
meters per hour. In such a case, the current  
location of your vehicle may not be dis-  
played correctly while in traffic congestion  
or in a parking lot.  
Positioning technology  
Positioning by GPS  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a  
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each  
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of  
21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-  
nals giving time and position information. This  
ensures that signals from at least three can be  
picked up from any open area on the earths  
surface.  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends  
on how good the reception is. When the sig-  
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS  
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude  
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.  
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-  
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained  
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.  
How do GPS and Dead  
Reckoningwork together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-  
tem continually compares GPS data with your  
estimated position as calculated from the data  
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data  
from the built-in sensor is available for a long  
period, positioning errors are gradually com-  
pounded until the estimated position becomes  
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-  
nals are available, they are matched with the  
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct  
it for improved accuracy.  
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors  
may suddenly increase because of differ-  
ence in wheel diameter. Initialize the sensor  
status and it may recover the accuracy to  
normal condition.  
Positioning by Dead Reckoning”  
The built-in sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction  
with the Gyrosensorand inclination of the  
road with the G sensor.  
= For details, refer to Clearing status on  
The built-in sensor can even calculate  
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-  
pancies in the distance traveled caused by  
driving along winding roads or up slopes.  
If you use this navigation system with connect-  
ing the speed pulse, the system will become  
more accurate than no connection of speed  
186  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map matching  
When positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
As mentioned, the positioning systems used  
by this navigation system are susceptible to  
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-  
sion, place you in a location on the map where  
no road exists. In this situation, the processing  
system understands that vehicles travel only  
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-  
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map  
matching.  
!
GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-  
not be received from more than two GPS  
satellites.  
!
In some driving conditions, signals from  
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.  
In this case, it is impossible for the system  
to use GPS positioning.  
In tunnels or en-  
closed parking  
garages  
Under elevated  
roads or similar  
structures  
With map matching  
When driving  
among high build-  
ings  
When driving through  
a dense forest or tall  
trees  
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used  
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may  
be lost temporarily.  
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or car wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals, so keep the  
antenna clear.  
Without map matching  
Handling large errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by  
combining GPS, Dead Reckoningand map  
matching. However, in some situations, these  
functions may not work properly, and the error  
may become bigger.  
p If a GPS signal have not been received for a  
long time, your vehicles actual position  
and the current position mark on the map  
may diverge considerably or may not be up-  
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is  
restored, accuracy will be recovered.  
187  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
If you drive in zigzags.  
Conditions likely to cause  
noticeable positioning errors  
For various reasons, such as the state of the  
road you are traveling on and the reception  
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of  
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-  
played on the map screen.  
If the road has a series of hairpin bends.  
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.  
If there is a parallel road.  
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-  
tion.  
!
!
If there is another road very nearby, such  
as in the case of an elevated freeway.  
!
!
If you take a ferry.  
If you take a recently opened road that is  
not on the map.  
If you are driving on a long, straight road or  
a gently curving road.  
188  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with  
many height changes.  
!
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS  
signals for a considerable period.  
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-  
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot  
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.  
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-  
milar structure.  
!
If you join the road after driving around a  
large parking lot.  
!
!
When you drive around a traffic circle.  
!
If your vehicles wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
When starting driving immediately after  
starting the engine.  
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires  
for ones with a different size.  
Route setting information  
Route search specifications  
Your navigation system sets a route to your  
destination by applying certain built-in rules to  
the map data. This section provides some use-  
ful information about how a route is set.  
189  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
drive towards your destination for a while,  
and try route calculation again.  
CAUTION  
When a route is calculated, the route and voice  
guidance for the route are automatically set.  
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-  
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the  
time when the route was calculated is shown.  
One-way streets and street closures may not be  
taken into consideration. For example, if a street  
is open during the morning only, but you arrive  
later, it would be against the traffic regulations so  
you cannot drive along the set route. When driv-  
ing, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also,  
the system may not know some traffic regula-  
tions.  
!
When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a  
detour route may not be suggested if driv-  
ing through the traffic congestion would  
still be better than taking the detour.  
There may be instances when the starting  
point, the waypoint and the destination  
point are not on the highlighted route.  
The number of traffic circle exits displayed  
on the screen may differ from the actual  
number of roads.  
!
!
Route highlighting  
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
color on the map.  
!
The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the na-  
vigation system while taking the type of  
streets or traffic regulations into account. It  
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In  
some cases, you may not be able to set the  
streets you want to take. If you need to take  
a certain street, set a waypoint on that  
street.)  
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting  
point and destination may not be high-  
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-  
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,  
the route may appear to be cut off on the  
display, but voice guidance will continue.  
Auto reroute function  
!
!
If the destination is too far, there may be in-  
stances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set waypoints along  
the way.)  
!
If you deviate from the set route, the system  
will re-calculate the route from that point  
so that you remain on track to the destina-  
tion.  
This function may not work under certain  
conditions.  
!
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-  
tions from the freeway are announced.  
However, if you pass intersections, turns,  
and other guidance points in rapid succes-  
sion, some may delay or not be announced.  
It is possible that guidance may direct you  
off a freeway and then back on again.  
In some cases, the route may require you  
to travel in the opposite direction to your  
current heading. In such cases, you are in-  
structed to turn around, so please turn  
around safely by following the actual traffic  
rules.  
Handling and care of discs  
Some basic precautions are necessary when  
handling your discs.  
!
!
!
In some cases, a route may begin on the  
opposite side of a railway or river from your  
actual current location. If this happens,  
190  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Despite our careful design of the product,  
small scratches that do not affect actual  
operation may appear on the disc surface  
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient  
conditions for use or handling of the disc.  
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this  
Built-in drive and care  
!
Use only conventional, fully circular discs.  
Do not use shaped discs.  
product. Consider it to be normal wear and  
tear.  
!
!
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or  
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-  
mage the built-in drive.  
Do not touch the recorded surface of the  
discs.  
Store discs in their cases when not in use.  
Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-  
onments including under direct sunlight.  
Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-  
micals to the surface of the discs.  
To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,  
moving outward from the center.  
Playable discs  
DVD-Video and CD  
DVD and CD discs that display the logos  
shown below generally can be played on this  
built-in DVD drive.  
!
!
DVD-Video  
!
!
CD  
!
!
Condensation may temporarily impair the  
built-in drives performance. Leave it to ad-  
just to the warmer temperature for about  
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a  
soft cloth.  
Playback of discs may not be possible be-  
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,  
recorded application, playback environ-  
ment, storage conditions and so on.  
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.  
Read the precautions for discs before  
using them.  
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.  
This DVD drive may not be able to play all  
discs bearing the marks shown above.  
!
!
AVCHD recorded discs  
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded  
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-  
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If  
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.  
Ambient conditions for playing  
a disc  
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-  
ture cutout protects this product by switch-  
ing it off automatically.  
191  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Playing DualDisc  
Detailed information for  
playable media  
Compatibility  
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a  
recordable CD for audio on one side and a  
recordable DVD for video on the other.  
Playback of the DVD side is possible with  
this navigation system. However, since the  
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-  
patible with the general CD standard, it  
may not be possible to play the CD side  
with this navigation system.  
!
Common notes about disc compatibility  
!
!
!
!
Certain functions of this product may not  
be available for some discs.  
Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-  
teed.  
It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/  
DVD-RAM discs.  
Playback of discs may become impossible  
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-  
peratures, or depending on the storage  
conditions in the vehicle.  
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-  
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.  
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-  
blems on this navigation system. In some  
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in  
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To  
prevent this, we recommend you refrain  
from using DualDisc with this navigation  
system.  
DVD-Video discs  
!
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-  
gion numbers cannot be played on this  
DVD drive. The region number of the player  
can be found on this products chassis.  
!
Please refer to the manufacturer for more  
detailed information about DualDiscs.  
Dolby Digital  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual  
Layer) discs  
AVIC-Z110BT will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-  
nals internally and the sound will be output in  
stereo. (Equipped with optical output for fu-  
ture extension.)  
p Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolbyand the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
!
Unfinalized discs which have been re-  
corded with the Video format (video mode)  
cannot be played back.  
!
Discs which have been recorded with the  
Video Recording format (VR mode) can be  
played back. However, unfinalized discs  
may not be played back. Unplayable discs  
should be finalized.  
!
!
!
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have  
been recorded with Layer Jump recording  
cannot be played back.  
For more information about recording  
mode, please contact the manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.  
The following logo indicates that this unit is  
compatible with DVD-RW discs which have  
been recorded with the Video Recording  
format (VR mode).  
DTS sound  
DTS audio cannot be output, so select an  
audio setting other than DTS.  
DTSis registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
192  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-  
chies.  
!
!
Operations may vary depending on the  
kind of an external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
It may not be possible to play some music  
files from SD or USB because of file char-  
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-  
tion, playback environment, storage  
conditions, and so on.  
CD-R/CD-RW discs  
!
!
Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.  
It may not be possible to play back CD-R/  
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-  
corder or a personal computer because of  
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation  
on the lens of the built-in drive.  
USB storage device compatibility  
= For more details about USB storage device  
compatibility with this navigation system,  
Protocol: bulk  
!
Playback of discs recorded on a personal  
computer may not be possible, depending  
on the recording device, writing software,  
their settings, and other environmental fac-  
tors.  
Please record with the correct format. (For  
more details, please contact manufacturer  
of media, recorders, or writing software.)  
Titles and other text information recorded  
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-  
played by this product (in the case of audio  
data (CD-DA)).  
!
!
!
You cannot connect a USB storage device  
to this navigation system via a USB hub.  
Partitioned USB memory is not compatible  
with this navigation system.  
!
!
Firmly secure the USB storage device when  
driving. Do not let the USB storage device  
fall onto the floor, where it may become  
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
Some USB storage devices connected to  
this navigation system may generate noise  
on the radio.  
!
!
!
!
Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW  
discs before using them.  
Common notes about the external  
storage device (USB, SD)  
!
Do not connect anything other than the  
USB memory device.  
Do not leave the external storage device  
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-  
peratures.  
Depending on the kind of the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-  
tion system may not recognize the storage  
device or files may not be played back prop-  
erly.  
The text information of some audio and  
video files may not be correctly displayed.  
File extensions must be used properly.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of files on an external storage de-  
The sequence of audio files on USB mem-  
ory  
For USB memory, the sequence is different  
from that of USB memory device.  
!
SD memory card and SDHC memory card  
!
For more details about SD memory card  
compatibility with this navigation system,  
!
!
!
193  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any  
more subtitle files will not be recognized.  
Up to 64 characters can be used for the  
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-  
tension. If more than 64 characters are  
used for the file name, the subtitle file may  
not be recognized.  
Handling guidelines and  
supplemental information  
!
This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
!
Copyright protected files cannot be played  
back.  
!
The character code for the subtitle file  
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-  
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the  
characters to be displayed incorrectly.  
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly  
if the displayed characters in the subtitle  
file include control code.  
For materials that use a high transfer rate,  
the subtitles and video may not be comple-  
tely synchronized.  
Notes specific to DivX files  
!
Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-  
ner sites are guarantee for proper opera-  
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not  
operate properly.  
!
!
!
!
!
DRM rental files cannot be operated until  
playing back is started.  
The navigation system corresponds to a  
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43  
seconds. Search operations beyond this  
time limit are prohibited.  
If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-  
play within a very short time frame, such as  
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-  
played at the correct time.  
!
DivX VOD file playback requires supplying  
the ID code of this navigation system to the  
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,  
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX video (including  
DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX  
media files.  
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-  
ing site:  
http://www.divx.com/  
DivX subtitle files  
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension  
.srtcan be used.  
!
Only one subtitle file can be used for each  
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be  
associated.  
!
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same  
character string as the DivX file before the  
extension are associated with the DivX file.  
The character strings before the extension  
must be exactly the same. However, if there  
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in  
a single folder, the files are associated even  
if the file names are not the same.  
The subtitle file must be stored in the same  
folder as the DivX file.  
194  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Media compatibility chart  
General  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet  
and UDF 1.02  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo and Joliet  
File system  
FAT16/FAT32  
Maximum number of  
folders  
700  
300  
Maximum number of  
files  
999  
3 500  
2 500  
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI, WMV,  
MPEG-4  
Playable file types  
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX  
Notes:  
Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)  
MP3 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.mp3  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
for emphasis)  
Sampling frequency  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
ID3 tag  
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3  
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4  
Notes:  
!
!
Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist  
WMA compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
.wma  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
Note:  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice  
195  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
WAV compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Format  
.wav  
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM  
WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL cannot be played.  
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz  
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits  
MS ADPCM: 4 bits  
Quantization bits  
Note:  
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.  
AAC compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.m4a  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
Note:  
8 kHz to 18 kHz  
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.  
196  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Profile (DivX version)  
.avi/.divx  
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/  
Ver. 6.x  
Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital  
DivX files on the external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be played.  
Bit rate (MP3)  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
Sampling frequency  
(MP3)  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
for emphasis)  
Maximum image size  
Maximum file size  
Notes:  
720 pixels × 576 pixels  
4 GB  
!
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec  
Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight  
delay in the start of playback on discs.  
!
!
!
!
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.  
Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.  
Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and  
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.  
Video files compatibility (USB, SD)  
File extension  
.avi  
.mp4  
.m4v  
.wmv  
Format  
MPEG-4  
MPEG-4  
H.264  
H.264  
MPEG-4  
WMV  
Compatible video  
codec  
MPEG-4  
MPEG-4  
MPEG-4  
WMV  
Linear PCM  
(LPCM), IMA-  
ADPCM  
Compatible audio  
codec  
AAC  
AAC  
AAC  
WMA  
MP3  
Image size:  
QVGA (320 pix-  
els x 240 pixels)  
Bit rate:  
Image size:  
QVGA (320 pix-  
els x 240 pixels)  
Bit rate:  
Image size:  
QVGA (320 pix-  
els x 240 pixels)  
Bit rate:  
Image size:  
QVGA (320 pix-  
els x 240 pixels)  
Bit rate:  
Image size:  
QVGA (320 pix-  
els x 240 pixels)  
Bit rate:  
Recommended  
video specifications  
768 kbps  
768 kbps  
384 kbps  
768 kbps  
384 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Maximum file size  
2 GB  
Maximum playback  
time  
150 minutes  
197  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Common notes  
Example of a hierarchy  
!
The navigation system may not operate cor-  
rectly, depending on the application used  
to encode WMA files.  
Depending on the version of Windows  
Media Player used to encode WMA files,  
album names and other text information  
may not be correctly displayed.  
The following figure is an example of the tier  
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-  
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers  
are assigned and the order to be played back.  
: Folder  
!
: File  
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
1
2
!
!
The navigation system is not compatible  
with packet write data transfer.  
This navigation system can recognize up to  
32 characters, beginning with the first char-  
acter, including extension for the file and  
folder name. Depending on the display  
area, the navigation system may try to dis-  
play them with a reduced font size. How-  
ever, the maximum number of the  
characters that you can display varies ac-  
cording to the width of each character, and  
of the display area.  
Folder selection sequence or other opera-  
tions may be altered, depending on the en-  
coding or writing software.  
Regardless of the length of blank section  
between the songs of original recording,  
compressed audio discs play with a short  
pause between songs.  
3
4
5
6
Level 1  
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4  
Notes  
!
!
This product assigns folder numbers. The user  
cannot assign folder numbers.  
!
!
If there is a folder that does not contain any  
playable file, the folder itself will display in the  
folder list but you cannot check any files in  
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,  
these folders will be skipped without display-  
ing the folder number.  
Bluetooth  
198  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-  
nectivity technology that is developed as a  
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-  
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-  
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits  
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per  
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special  
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,  
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in  
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly  
2 000 companies worldwide.  
HD Radio Technology  
HD Radioä and the HD Radio Ready logo are  
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital  
Corporation.  
SD and SDHC logo  
!
The Bluetoothâ word mark and logos are re-  
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth  
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by  
Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other  
trademarks and trade names are those of  
their respective owners.  
SD Logo is a trademark.  
About the SAT RADIO  
READY Logo  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
WMA/WMV  
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the  
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM  
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold  
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-  
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or  
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-  
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be  
connected to this navigation system.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-  
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
Note:  
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver  
broadcasting technology to provide listeners  
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear  
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-  
lite radio will create and package over 100  
channels of digital- quality music, news,  
sports, talk and childrens programming.  
SAT Radio, the SAT Radio logo and all re-  
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite  
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
DivX  
199  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-  
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc.  
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on  
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.  
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,  
individual DivX video files are called Titles.  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a  
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind  
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-  
cal order.  
iPod  
Made for iPodmeans that an electronic ac-  
cessory has been designed to connect specifi-  
cally to iPod and has been certified by the  
developer to meet Apple performance stan-  
dards.  
Plays DivXâ video.  
p DivXâ is a registered trademark of DivX,  
Inc., and is used under license.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-  
eral applications can be used to encode AAC  
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-  
pending on the application which is used to  
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-  
coded by iTunes version 7.7.  
iPhone  
Detailed information  
regarding connectable iPods  
Works with iPhonemeans that an electronic  
accessory has been designed to connect spe-  
cifically to iPhone and has been certified by  
the developer to meet Apple performance  
standards.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
CAUTION  
!
!
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost  
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while  
using the navigation system.  
Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-  
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure  
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-  
tion due to the resulting high temperature.  
Do not leave the iPod in any location with  
high temperatures.  
Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not  
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-  
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
!
!
iTunes  
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered  
in the U.S. and other countries.  
For details, refer to the iPods manuals.  
200  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
video in the form of disturbances such as  
spots or colored stripes.  
Using the LCD screen correctly  
Handling the LCD screen  
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-  
come very hot, resulting in possible da-  
mage to the LCD screen. When not using  
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to  
direct sunlight as much as possible.  
The LCD screen should be used within the  
temperature ranges shown in Specifica-  
tions.  
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures  
higher or lower than the operating tem-  
perature range, because the LCD screen  
may not operate normally and could be da-  
maged.  
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-  
crease its visibility within the vehicle.  
Please do not press strongly on it as this  
may damage it.  
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive  
force as this may scratch it.  
Maintaining the LCD screen  
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen  
or cleaning it, first turn the system power  
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.  
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not  
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or  
abrasive chemical cleaners.  
!
!
LED (light-emitting diode)  
backlight  
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-  
play to illuminate the LCD screen.  
!
At low temperatures, using the LED back-  
light may increase image lag and degrade  
the image quality because of the character-  
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will  
improve with an increase in temperature.  
The product lifetime of the LED backlight is  
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may  
decrease if used in high temperatures.  
If the LED backlight reaches the end of its  
product lifetime, the screen will become  
dimmer and the image will no longer be  
visible. In that case, please consult your  
dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER  
Service Station.  
!
!
!
!
!
Never touch the LCD screen with anything  
besides your finger when operating the  
Touch panel functions. The LCD screen can  
scratch easily.  
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen  
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air  
conditioner, make sure that air from the air  
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from  
the heater may break the LCD screen, and  
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-  
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-  
sulting in possible damage.  
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)  
may appear on the LCD screen. These are  
due to the characteristics of the LCD  
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.  
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is  
exposed to direct sunlight.  
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
!
!
201  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display information  
Destination Menu  
Phone Menu  
Page  
Page  
[Address]  
[Dial Pad]  
[Return Home]  
[POI]  
[Call Home]  
[Contacts]  
[Gas Station]  
[ATM]  
[Contacts Transfer]  
[Received Calls]  
[Dialed Calls]  
[Missed Calls]  
[GOOG-411]  
[Coffee]  
[Hotel]  
[Spell Name]  
[Near Me]  
[Near Destination]  
[Around City]  
[AVIC FEEDS]  
[Favorites]  
[History]  
Settings Menu  
[Cancel Route]  
[MSN Direct]  
[Coordinates]  
[Route Overview]  
Page  
[Navi Settings]  
[System Settings]  
[AV Settings]  
[AV Sound]  
[Map Settings]  
[Bluetooth Settings]  
[Setting Replicator]  
202  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
System Settings menu  
Navi Settings menu  
Page  
[Regional Settings]  
Page  
[Program Language], [Voice Lan-  
guage]  
[Connection Status]  
[3D Calibration Status]  
[Gas Mileage]  
[Time]  
[km / mile]  
[Speed]  
[Drive Log Settings]  
[Demo Mode]  
[Volume]  
[Set Home]  
[Splash Screen]  
[Modify Current Location]  
[Back Camera]  
[Screen Calibration]  
[Illumi Color]  
[Service Information]  
[Restore Factory Settings]  
203  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map Settings menu  
AV System Settings menu  
Page  
Page  
[Displayed Info]  
[Close Up View]  
[City Map]  
[AV1 Input]  
[AV2 Input]  
[ANT CTRL]  
[City Map Barrier]  
[Show Traffic Incident]  
[Bluetooth Connected]  
[Current Street Name]  
[Favorites Icon]  
[Wide Mode]  
[Rear SP]  
[Mute]  
[Mute Level]  
[Guidance/Tel SP]  
[VR Catalog Menu]  
[DivX VOD]  
[3D Land Mark]  
[Show Manuever]  
[MSN Direct]  
[Quick Access Selection]  
[Overlay POI]  
[View Mode]  
[Day/Night Display]  
[AV Guide Mode]  
[Road Color]  
204  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AV Sound Settings menu  
Bluetooth Settings menu  
Page  
Page  
[FAD/BAL] ([Balance])  
[EQ]  
[Connection]  
[Registration]  
[Loudness]  
[Sub Woofer]  
[HPF]  
[Device Name]  
[Password]  
[Bluetooth On/Off]  
[Echo Cancel]  
[SLA]  
[Bass Booster]  
[Staging]  
[Auto Answer Preference]  
[Refuse All Calls]  
[Clear Memory]  
[Firmware update]  
205  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX  
Glossary  
DivX is a popular media technology created by  
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-  
pressed video with high visual quality that  
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files  
can also include advanced media features like  
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.  
Many DivX media files are available for down-  
load online, and you can create your own  
using your personal content and easy-to-use  
tools from DivX.com.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.  
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of  
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional  
presence and atmosphere.  
DivX Certified  
DivX Certified products are officially tested by  
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all  
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.  
Bit rate  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps  
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,  
the more information is available to reproduce  
the sound. Using the same encoding method  
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better  
the sound.  
Favorites  
A frequently visited location (such as your  
workplace or a relatives home) that you can  
register to allow easy routing.  
Built-in sensor  
The built-in sensor that enables the system to  
estimate your vehicles position.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-  
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-  
ety of purposes.  
CD-DA  
This stands for a general music CD (commer-  
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this  
word is sometime used for a distinction be-  
tween data CDs (which include compressed  
audio files) and general music CDs.  
Guidance mode  
The mode in which guidance is given as you  
drive to your destination; the system automati-  
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route  
has been set.  
Chapter  
Guidance point  
Titles of DVD-Video or DVD-VR are in turn di-  
vided into chapters which are numbered in  
the same way as the chapters of a book. With  
discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find  
a desired scene with chapter search.  
These are important landmarks along your  
route, generally intersections. The next gui-  
dance point along your route is indicated on  
the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-  
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-  
angle mark.  
Destination  
A location you choose as the end point of your  
journey.  
206  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
ID3 tag  
MPEG  
This is a method of embedding track-related  
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-  
formation can include the track title, the ar-  
tists name, the album title, the music genre,  
the year of production, comments and other  
data. The contents can be freely edited using  
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.  
Although the tags are restricted by the num-  
ber of characters, the information can be  
viewed when the track is played back.  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts  
Group, and is an international video image  
compression standard.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple  
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot  
scenes, only images from one camera at a  
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs  
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-  
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
ISO9660 format  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-  
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple  
tracks. For example, dialog in up to 8 lan-  
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-  
deo, letting you choose the language as  
desired.  
This is the international standard for the for-  
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.  
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations  
for the following two levels:  
!
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name  
consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte  
English capital letters, half-byte numerals  
and the _sign, with a file-extension of  
three characters).  
Multi-session  
Multi-session is a recording method that al-  
lows additional data to be recorded later.  
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or  
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is  
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-  
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-  
sions in one disc.  
!
!
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters  
(including the separation mark .and a file  
extension). Each folder contains less than 8  
hierarchies.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
Multi-subtitle  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages  
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting  
you choose as desired.  
JPEG  
Packet write  
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts  
Group, and is an international still image com-  
pression standard.  
This is a general term for a method of writing  
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-  
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or  
hard disks.  
MP3  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an  
audio compression standard established by a  
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-  
tional Standards Organization). MP3 is able to  
compress audio data to about 1/10th the size  
of a conventional disc.  
207  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Parental lock  
Track log  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-  
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-  
vents children from viewing such scenes. With  
this kind of disc, if you set the units parental  
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for  
children will be disabled, or these scenes will  
be skipped.  
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-  
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-  
tivated. This recorded route is called a track  
log. It is handy when you want to check a  
route traveled or if returning along a complex  
route.  
VBR  
Phone book  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally  
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more  
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit  
rate according to the needs of audio compres-  
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-  
priority sound quality.  
An address book on users phone is collec-  
tively referred to as Phone book. Depending  
on the cellular phone, the Phone bookmay  
be called a name such as Contacts, Busi-  
ness cardor something else.  
Point of Interest (POI)  
Voice guidance  
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations  
stored in the data, such as railway stations,  
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.  
The giving of directions by navigation voice  
while in guidance.  
Waypoint  
Region number  
A location that you choose to visit before your  
destination; a journey can be built up from  
multiple waypoints and the destination.  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region  
numbers indicating the area in which they  
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-  
sible unless it features the same region num-  
ber as the DVD player.  
WMA  
WMA is short for Windows Mediaä Audio and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.  
Route setting  
The process of determining the ideal route to a  
specific location; route setting is done auto-  
matically by the system when you specify a  
destination.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your  
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on  
the map.  
Title  
DVD-Video or DVD-VR discs have a high data  
capacity, enabling recording of multiple videos  
on a single disc. If, for example, one disc con-  
tains three separate videos, they are divided  
into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy  
the convenience of title search and other func-  
tions.  
208  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Audio  
Specifications  
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4  
General  
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×  
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC  
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)  
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,  
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
Channels Driven)  
Maximum current consumption  
........................................... 10.0 A  
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]  
allowable)  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Preout output level (max) .... 4 V  
Preout impedance .................. 100 ohm  
Equalizer (7-Band Graphic Equalizer):  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/125 Hz/315 Hz/800 Hz/  
2 kHz/5 kHz/12.5 kHz  
Chassis ............................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
165 mm  
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)  
Nose ..................................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 17 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
Gain ...................................... 12 dB  
Loudness contour:  
5/8 in.)  
Weight .......................................... 2.43 kg (5.3 lbs)  
NAND flash memory ............. 4 GB  
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB  
(10 kHz)  
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Navigation  
GPS Receiver:  
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS  
SPS (Standard Positioning  
Service)  
(volume: 30 dB)  
HPF:  
Reception system .......... 32-channel multi-channel  
reception system  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz  
Sensitivity .......................... -143 dBm (typ)  
Position update frequency  
........................................... Approx. once per second  
GPS antenna:  
Slope .................................... 12 dB/oct  
Subwoofer:  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... 18 dB/oct  
Gain ...................................... 24/+6 dB  
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse  
Bass boost:  
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/  
right-handed helical polari-  
zation  
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm  
(1-1/4 in. × 5/8 in. ×  
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB  
DVD Drive  
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX system  
1-3/8 in.)  
Weight ................................ 96 g (0.2 lbs)  
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DVD-R  
(DL), DVD-RW, CD-ROM,  
Display  
CD-DA, CD-R/RW  
Region number ........................ 1  
Signal format:  
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 inch wide/16:9  
(effective display area:  
159 mm × 84 mm)  
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz  
Number of quantization bits  
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear  
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,  
at sampling frequency  
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)  
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving  
Backlight ..................................... LED  
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible  
Tolerable temperature range:  
96 kHz)  
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F  
Power off ............................ 4 °F to +176 °F  
Angle adjustment .................... 0° to 22°  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-  
work)  
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A  
network))  
209  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB  
(1 kHz))  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IHF-A network)  
CEA2006 Specifications  
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)  
Output level:  
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)  
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)  
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded  
by iTunes):  
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels  
(4 W and 1 % THD+N)  
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into  
.m4a  
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,  
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :  
4 W)  
.avi, .divx  
Note  
USB  
Specifications and design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice due to im-  
provements.  
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed  
Max current supply ................. 500 mA  
Max memory capacity ........... 16 GB  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
USB class .................................... Mass storage class  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
SD  
Compatible physical format  
..................................................... Version 2.00  
Max memory capacity ........... 16 GB  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
Bluetooth  
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0+EDR  
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.  
(Power class 2)  
FM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IHF-A network)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
mono)  
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
AM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
210  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU  
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
TEL: 905-479-4411  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL: 55-9178-4270  
 
: 台北4413  
: (02) 2521-3588  
司  
9901-6  
: (0852) 2848-6488  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2009 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
Printed in Thailand  
<KMZZX> <09G00000>  
<CRB3035-B/N> UC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Philips Cordless Telephone CD1551B 37 User Manual
Philips Microcassette Recorder 1600 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player PET988 User Manual
Philips Surge Protector SPP1180WC User Manual
Pioneer Flat Panel Television PRO 1000HDI User Manual
Pitney Bowes Postal Equipment DM800 User Manual
Porter Cable Portable Generator CH350CS User Manual
Poulan Chainsaw 966063101 User Manual
Poulan Lawn Mower XT24H42YT User Manual
ProForm Treadmill 296331 User Manual